K-MC1000 User Manual-Q00000037 - EN - 00 - G0 - 20220318

Elevator integrated controller
K-MC1000
User manual
In order to use this product safely, be sure to read the instruction manual.
In addition, please keep this instruction manual in a safe place and hand it over to the
end user.
Contents I
Preface Ⅱ
Safety Matters and Specifications Ⅲ
Product Information 1
Mechanical installation 2
Electrical Installation 3
Accessories 4
System Adjustments 5
Events/Troubleshooting 6
Maintenance and Repair 7
Application Scheme 8
Appendix 9
Q00000038_EN_00_G0
Nidec Kinetek Elevator Technology (Wuxi) Co., Ltd.

Ⅰ Contents
Ⅰ Contents
Ⅰ CONTENTS........................................................................................................................ I
Ⅱ PREFACE ........................................................................................................................ 1
Ⅱ SAFETY MATTERS AND SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................. 1
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 5
1.1. Product Information ................................................................................................... 5
1.2. Product Model Confirmation ..................................................................................... 5
1.3. Product Features ....................................................................................................... 6
1.4. Product coverage....................................................................................................... 6
1.5. Product Features ....................................................................................................... 7
1.6. Product Specifications ............................................................................................ 18
2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ................................................................................... 20
2.1. Installation conditions ............................................................................................. 20
Ⅰ
2.2. Installation space ..................................................................................................... 21
Contents
2.3. Shape & Mounting Dimensions............................................................................... 21
3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION..................................................................................... 24
3.1. Precautions .............................................................................................................. 24
3.2. Fusion parts descriptions ....................................................................................... 25
3.3. Wiring instructions .................................................................................................. 25
3.4. Main circuit port definition ...................................................................................... 31
3.5. PG card terminal definition ..................................................................................... 32
3.6. K-MC1000 control circuit terminal description ...................................................... 34
3.7. Split-one-Fusion input & out signal port ................................................................ 37
3.8. Terminal limits position map................................................................................... 46
4 ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................................ 47
4.1. Simplex standard configuration ............................................................................. 47
4.2. Parallel elevator configuration ................................................................................ 49
4.3. Peripheral accessories selection ............................................................................ 49
4.4. PG card configuration ............................................................................................. 51
4.5. Brake resistor configuration ................................................................................... 51
4.6. Peripheral electrical component configuration ..................................................... 52
4.7. K-CT1000 installation, wiring and commissioning ................................................ 53
4.8. K-CC1000 installation, wiring and commissioning ................................................ 57
4.9. K-CI1000 installation, wiring and commissioning ................................................. 61
4.10. K-06T installation, wiring and commissioning ................................................ 62
-I-
Ⅰ Contents
4.11. K-03T installation, wiring and commissioning................................................ 76

4.12. K-PI1100 Installation, Wiring and Commissioning ......................................... 81
4.15. Voice annunication controller installation, wiring and adjustments ........... 106
4.16. Re-leveling controller installation, wiring and commissioning ................... 110
5 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS.......................................................................................... 111
5.1. User interface description..................................................................................... 111
5.2. Controller indicator description ........................................................................... 118
5.3. System adjustments flow chart ............................................................................ 121
5.4. System Configuration Parameters ....................................................................... 122
5.5. Motor static self-learning ...................................................................................... 124
5.6. Motor dynamic correction ..................................................................................... 128
5.7. Elevator trial run .................................................................................................... 130
5.8. Elevator shaft self-learning ................................................................................... 132
Ⅰ
5.9. Door machine adjustments ................................................................................... 135

Contents
5.10. High speed test run ........................................................................................ 140

5.11. Comfort adjustment ........................................................................................ 141
5.12. Level deviation adjustment ............................................................................ 149
5.13. Protection parameter adjustment .................................................................. 151
5.14. Standard function setting............................................................................... 155
5.15. Optional function adjustments ...................................................................... 161
5.16. Control system parameters ............................................................................ 173
5.17. Elevator acceptance instructions .................................................................. 175
6 EVENTS/TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................ 183
7 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR .................................................................................. 195
8 APPLICATION SCHEME ........................................................................................... 197
8.1 Internal rotor motor troubleshooting instructions .............................................. 197
8.2 Introduction to System Built-in Group Control ................................................... 198
8.3 ELGO Installation and configuration .................................................................... 200
8.4 Brake voltage switching application program ..................................................... 207
9 APPENDIX ................................................................................................................. 209
9.1. K-OP1000 Handheld operator Description........................................................... 209
9.2. K-OP1000 Parameters List .................................................................................... 213
9.3. K-OP1002 Parameters list ..................................................................................... 229
HISTORIC VERSION ........................................................................................................ 244
-II-
Ⅱ Preface
Ⅱ Preface
Please read this manual carefully and complete the installation, operation and maintenance work after
fully understanding its contents.
Please use the product after understanding the safety precautions of the product.
 Imterminalant operationment
The information provided in this manual is a general use and technical description of this product. For
any specific application of this product, users need to complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing.
The company is not responsible for any consequences arising from misuse of the information
contained in the manual.
Installation and use of this product must comply with the relevant national, regional and local
regulations.
This product is used for functional safety requirements and must comply with relevant safety
standards and specifications.
It is strictly forbidden to modify this series of products without authorization. The company is not
responsible for accidents caused by unauthorized modifications.
The specifications of this series of products will be changed due to product improvements without
Ⅱ
prior notice. Please understand.
Please contact us if you have suggestions for improvements or corrections in the manual.
Preface
 Reader object
User
Elevator control designer
Elevator engineering maintenance personnel
User supterminal staff
 Note for readers

The illustrations in this manual are for illustration only and may differ from the products you ordered.
The contents of this manual will be changed in a timely manner due to product improvements or
specification changes, and to improve the convenience of the manual.
If you need to order this manual due to damage or loss, please contact us.
The contents of this manual have been confirmed to be correct at the time of printing; however, our
company is committed to continuous improvement of the product, so the manufacturer reserves the
right to modify the specifications, performance and other contents of this manual without prior notice
to the user.
This manual should be kept by the actual user of the product.
After reading, please keep this manual in a place where users can check it at any time.
It is imterminalant to ensure that this manual is delivered to the end user.
-1-
Ⅱ Preface
Ⅱ
Preface
-2-
Ⅱ Safety Matters and Specifications
Please read the “Safety Precautions” carefully before use to ensure proper use!
The precautions listed here contain imterminalant safety-related content, so be sure to follow them.
The level of safety precautions is divided into "dangerous" and "attention".
If used incorrectly, it can be dangerous and can result in death or serious

Danger injury.
Dangerous if used improperly, may result in moderate injury or only

Caution material damage.
However, even matters marked as “ Attention” can have serious consequences in some cases.
Therefore, regardless of the level of attention, imterminalant content is recorded and must be strictly
observed.
The following descriptions of the "forbidden" and "instructed" icons are described below.
Prohibited Indicates general prohibitions.
Guidance Indicate general user behavior.
Ⅱ
 Installation precautions
Safety Matters and Specifications

Danger
Please strictly follow the mechanical and electrical installation specifications for installation.
Installation must be performed by professionals who have the necessary training and the necessary
experience.
Read this safety information and user manual carefully before operation.
Caution
Please install on non-combustible objects such as metal; please keep away from flammable, explosive
and other items. Otherwise there is a fire, the danger of explosion!
Do not install it in a place where water or raindrops can splash. Otherwise there is danger of damaging
the controller!
Please install on the object with enough load-bearing capacity. Otherwise there is a controller drop,
controller damage danger!
Do not drop conductive objects such as metal into the controller. Otherwise there is a danger of fire and
damage to the controller!
Damaged or missing parts control system, do not install.
-1-
 Wiring precautions
Danger
Before wiring, please confirm whether the input power is off. Otherwise there is a risk of electric shock
and fire!
Please be a professional electrical engineer wiring work. Otherwise there is a risk of electric shock and
fire!
Do not touch the output conductor part directly with your hand, or make the output wire contact the
chassis. Do not short the output wire. Otherwise it will cause electric shock and short circuit, or cause
danger of fire!
Circuit board circuit can not be directly touched by hand, otherwise there is the danger of damage to the
device.
Caution
Please confirm the specifications of the power supply and the rated voltage of the controller. Otherwise
there will be electric shock, damage to the controller and the risk of fire!
Do not conduct pressure test on the controller. Doing so can cause damage to the semiconductor
components and the like.
Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torque. Otherwise there is a risk of fire!
Ⅱ
 Operating precautions
Danger
When the power is on, do not touch the elevator controller. Otherwise it may cause damage to
controller and electric shock!
Please confirm the operation signal is cut off, and then reset the fault. Otherwise there is a risk of
injury!
During operation, do not perform signal check or error operation. Otherwise there is danger of injury
and controller damage.
Attention
The control cabinet has been properly set at the factory, so please do not change it, especially during
operation. Failure to do so may result in component damage.
 Maintenance and inspection precautions

Danger
Operators must be qualified maintenance personnel; maintenance personnel who have received
appropriate training, have sufficient knowledge and practical experience, and can obtain the necessary
guidance and support capabilities of their maintenance organization to perform the required
maintenance operations safely.
-2-
Please do not check and wiring work when the power is on. Otherwise, there will be danger of electric
shock!
Before maintenance, remove the metal accessories (such as watches, rings, etc.) from the body of the
user and wear insulated and insulated clothing. Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock!
During power-on, do not change the wiring and disassembly terminals and connectors. Otherwise there
is the danger of electric shock!
Reference to EN13015 Maintenance for lifts and escalators — Rules for maintenance
instructions.
Attention
The integrated circuit is used on the control circuit board, so please be careful.
If you touch it directly by hand, the board may be damaged due to static electricity.
Ⅱ
-3-
Ⅱ
-4-
Product Information
1. Product Information
1.1. Product Information

Check the appearance to check if the product is scratched or dirty. Damage caused by product
handling is not covered by the company. When the product is damaged, please contact the shipping
company immediately.
Confirm the consistency of the model and order of the product.
If you find any defects in the product, please contact the office where you purchased the product or
the sales headquarters of the company.
1.2. Product Model Confirmation
Packaged Items K-MC1000 Commissioning Manual
Quantity 1 1
Cabinet nameplate
Trademark Integrated Elevator

Control
Product Model Product Version
Input Parameters Output Parameters

Input Voltage Output Voltage
Input Frequency Output Frequency
Input Current Output Current
Input Phase Rated Power
Product Information
Company LOGO
Country of manufacture
Product model
K MC1000 G
Company Product Power Level Voltage Level PG Card Code

code Category 00 NA
2R2G 2.2kW 2 Three-phase 200V
3R7G 3.7kW 07 LPG07(Incremental type encoder)
4 Three-phase 400V
5R5G 5.5kW 10 LPG10(sin/cos type encoder)
7R5G 7.5kW Synchronous &Asynchronous
11 motor universal
011G 11kW
015G 15kW
018G 18.5kW
022G 22kW
030G 30kW
037G 37kW
045G 45kW
055G 55kW
075G 75kW
-5-
Product Information
1.3. Product Features

 With the direct control technology based on the principle of distance control, the speed curve is
generated in real time.
 Automatically recognizes short floor operation.
 Multiple CPU redundancy control. The signal processor adopts the fixed-point low-power core of TI
Company of the United Operations, which improves the real-time control capability of the elevator.
 The load sensorless load compensation start-up technology enables the elevator to have excellent
starting comfort without the need to install a weighing device.
 Suitable for synchronous and asynchronous motors. With motor static self-tuning function.
 Adopt vector control technology. The motor has excellent speed regulation performance and good
elevator comfort.
 New PWM dead zone compensation technology to effectively reduce motor noise and motor loss.
 Full CAN serial communication, improve data transmission capability and enhance communication
reliability.
 Built-in precision real-time clock, providing rich time-sharing control, easy to implement intelligent
building management.
 Supterminal 220Vac power input, UPS emergency backup operation after power failure.
 Control drive architecture is based on one. The structure of the whole device is compact, the wiring is
reduced, the reliability is increased, and the operation is simpler.
 Simple keyboard design makes the elevator adjustments and maintenance easy.
 Supterminal a variety of adjustments methods. Computer software adjustments, mobile phone
Product Information
software adjustments, handheld operator adjustments.

 Easy-to-understand functional parameter design for maximum ease of adjustments.
 Multiple safety protections in accordance with EN81-20 and GB7588 safety standards.
 Provide UCMP solution and be UCMP certified.
 Passed the EMC laboratory professional test. Strong anti-interference ability, anti-conduction
interference and coupling interference 4kV.
 Redundant security design. Elevator control and drive control have safety protection functions, which
greatly improve the safety factor of the elevator.
 Professional drive control design, strong environmental adaptability, comprehensive protection
against grid fluctuations, dust, high temperature and lightning.
 Flexible and modular structure design
1.4. Product coverage

Simplex control: Simplex operation
Duplex control: 2 car duplex operation
Group control: 6 car group control
Destination floor control: 8 units
-6-
Product Information
1.5. Product Features

Standard function
Ref. Name Description Remarks

Direct landing Based on the principle of distance, the running curve Standard
1.
operation and intelligent car scheme are generated in real time. configuration
Static self-learning Self-learning of the motor adopts static self-learning Standard
2.
of the motor mode configuration
When using two independent adjustment modes, speed
Built-in
loop and position loop, there is no need to externally Standard
3. pre-weighing
weigh the compensation device. Pressure differential configuration
compensation
pressure level power supply configuration
When the synchronous motor stops, the motor
Stopping slope of maintains the current and delays the delay in the way Standard
4.
the elevator of the slope to avoid the motor noise caused by the configuration
instantaneous current withdrawal.
When the system detects that the motor is overcurrent, Standard
Overcurrent
5. it protects immediately and prohibits the elevator from configuration
protection
running.
When the system detects overvoltage of the motor, it Standard
Overvoltage
6. protects immediately and prohibits the elevator from configuration
protection
running.
When the system detects a motor or drive overload, it Standard
7. Overload protection protects immediately and prohibits the elevator from configuration
running.
Product Information
When the system detects the undervoltage of the bus, it Standard
Bus voltage
8. protects immediately and prohibits the elevator from configuration
protection
running.
When the system operation detects the input or output Standard
Drive phase loss
9. phase loss, it immediately protects and prohibits the configuration
protection
elevator from running.
When the system detects that the inverter module is Standard
Inverter overheat
10. overheated, it protects immediately and prohibits the configuration
protection
When the system detects that the rectifier module is Standard
Rectification
11. overheated, it protects immediately and prohibits the configuration
overheat protection
Lost of position When the floor position is incorrect, the elevator Standard
12.
protection automatically returns to the ground floor to correct it. configuration
The LED external keyboard is equipped as standard. In
addition to the specific parameter adjustments
On-board user Standard
13. function, it can also display information such as
interface configuration
current speed, running current, elevator status and fault
record.
The upper (lower) limit switch, after the action, the
Limit switch Standard
14. elevator is prohibited from running up (down), but can
protection configuration
run in the opposite direction.
-7-
Product Information

When the drive part fails, the elevator is forbidden to
Drive fault Standard
15. run, and some drive faults can be automatically reset
by parameter setting.
Drive Feedback When the enable and direction are given, the drive Standard
16.
Detection feedback signal is detected. configuration
When the brake is opened or closed, the system detects
Brake switch whether the brake switch is abnormal by the input Standard
17.
feedback detection signal on the controller. When abnormal, the system configuration
automatically protects.
When the elevator is running and stopped, the system
detects the abnormality of the suction and release of
Motor contactor Standard
18. the motor contactor through the input signal on the
contact detection configuration
controller. When abnormal, the system automatically
protects.
When the brake contactor is running or stopped, the
Brake contactor input and output signals on the controller are used to
Standard
19. contact detection detect whether the brake contactor is closed or released
configuration
system abnormally. When abnormal, the system automatically
protects.
Before the elevator is ready to run or during operation,
Door lock contact it is detected by the input signal on the controller Standard
20.
detection whether the door lock loop is disconnected. When configuration
disconnected, the system automatically protects.
The system detects whether the safety circuit is
Safety circuit disconnected through the input signal on the controller Standard
Product Information
21.
detection when there is working power. When disconnected, the configuration
system automatically protects.
After the elevator enters the inspection operation, the
normal operation control sequence will be canceled,
including any automatic door operation function,
emergency electric operation function and docking
Inspection operation operation function. The inspection operation Standard
22.
operation needs to continue the pressure maintenance inspection configuration
or maintenance down button. Under the safe operation
condition of the elevator, the elevator can be operated
up or down at the inspection speed; when the button is
released, the elevator stops immediately.
After the emergency electric operation switch is
operated, the normal operation control sequence will
be cancelled, including any automatic door operation
function, and the safety clamp electrical safety device,
the governor electrical safety device, the accending car
Emergency electric overspeed protection safety device, the final limit Standard
23.
operation switch and the buffer electrical safety device are configuration
invalid. Once the inspection operation is activaed, the
emergency electric operation should be canceled.
For emergency electric operation, it is necessary to
continuously press the emergency electric up or
emergency electric down button to enable the elevator
-8-
Product Information

to run up or down at the inspection speed; release the
button and the elevator immediately stops running.
The elevator runs up (or down) with normal insection
Terminal inspection speed to the upper (or lower) terminal slowdown limit Standard
24.
speed limit switch. At this time, the elevator speed is switched to configuration
the low inspection speed.
After the elevator enters the inspection operation, if the
door lock circuit is disconnected, the system will give
the door closing command when the up (or down)
Opening and inspection button is pressed. When the door lock
circuit is connected, the elevator can run up (or down). Standard
25. closing of the door
configuration
during inspection If the elevator stops at the door zone position, while
holding down the up and down buttons together, the
system will give a door opening command to open the
door.
Before the first run, the system needs to self-learn the
Standard
26. Shaft self-learning shaft information, including the height of each floor
configuration
and the position of the terminal slowdown limit switch.
The system fails to get the correct shaft height
Shaft self-learning information during or at the end of the shaft Standard
27.
failure diagnosis self-learning process, and the elevator will not operate configuration
normally.
In the automatic operation or the attendant operation,
the elevator automatically responds to the up and down
call button signals while responding to the command Standard
28. Selective collective
Product Information
signal in the car during operation. The passengers on configuration
any floor can summon the elevator by registering the
up and down call signals.
When the elevator is not in inspection operation and it
does not stop in the leveling area. At this time, as long
Auto-releveling Standard
29. as the safety requirements are met, the elevator will
operation configuration
automatically run at the leveling speed to the floor and
then open the door.
If the elevator continues to close the door for 20
Repeatedly opening
seconds and the door has not been closed, the elevator Standard
30. and closing the
will switch to the door opening action, and the door configuration
door
will remain open after 5 repetitions.
Car call can be made inside the machine room via Standard
31. Machine room calls
parameter setting. configuration
In the automatic operation, when the door is opened,
Close door sooner you can press the door close button (corresponding to
Standard
32. using door close the input signal action on the controller in the car) to
configuration
button immediately output the door closing action and close
the door in advance.
When the elevator is parked in the door zone, you can
Door open button press the door open button (corresponding to the input Standard
33.
to open the door signal on the controller in the car) in the car to reopen configuration
the door that has been closed or not closed.
-9-
Product Information

When the middle of the door is blocked during the
door closing process, the light curtain activates, and
Door light curtain Standard
34. the elevator will open the door. Note: Light curtain
protection is automatically cancelled during fire
fighting operations.
In the automatic operation, when the full load input
signal is activated, the elevator does not respond to the
hall call signal. At this time, the hall call can still be Standard
35. Full load operation
registered. The hall call at that landing can open the configuration
door. After the full load signal is off, the registered
hall calls automatically enters the call operation.
When the elevator is not in inspection operation, and
the overload input signal is activated, the elevator
keeps the door open and the buzzer prompts. Note:
Standard
36. Overload protection Before the door lock is closed, the overload switch
configuration
activate and the elevator immediately opens the door.
After the door lock is closed, the overload protection is
automatically cancelled.
The attendant operation can be selected by dialing the
attendant switch in the CAR OPERATING PANEL
(corresponding to the input signal action on the
controller in the car). When the attendant operation
activates, the elevator does not automatically close the
Attendant door. The door closing of the elevator is carried out Standard
37.
Operation under the condition that the continuously presses the configuration
door closing button. When there is an hall call
Product Information
registration, the buzzer in the car prompts and

simultaneously corresponds to the call outside the hall.
The command flashes, prompting the driver to call
someone.
The dot matrix module is used outside the hall and in
the car to display the running direction of the elevator, Standard
38. Dot matrix display
the floor where it is located, and the operation of the configuration
elevator (such as inspection, overload, fault).
When the elevator is running, the direction arrow is
Scrolling display Standard
39. displayed by scrolling, both outside the hall and in the
direction configuration
car.
The car stops at a certain floor station. After pressing
the hall call button, the car door automatically opens.
Open the door Standard
40. Note: Press and hold for more than 20 seconds, the
outside the hall configuration
system will close the button and perform the door
closing operation.
The system can recognize the stuck hall call,
Stuck hall call automatically remove the stucked call, and prevent the Standard
41.
monitoring elevator from closing the door due to the stuck hall call configuration
button.
Car shutdown In the automatic running operation, the car shutdown Standard
42. switch action (corresponding to the input signal LK
point action on the outer call board), eliminating all
-10-
Product Information

hall call registration. The elevator is still operating
normally, when responding to the registered car
command, then returning to the lock floor. After that,
the elevator is stopped, the door open button light is
turned on, and the car interior lighting and the fan are
turned off. When the car shutdown switch is reset, the
elevator resumes normal operation.
In the automatic operation, the fire alarm signal is
activated (corresponding to the input signal FR point
action on the hall call board), the elevator immediately
eliminates all car and hall calls, and runs to the fire
Fire return return floor in the fastest way. After returned to the Standard
43.
operation fire return floor, the fire-fighting signal output will configuration
come on, and the system will keep the door open; if the
elevator is running in the reverse direction, it will stop
at the nearest floor, do not open the door and drive
directly to the fire return floor, keep the door open.
Fire alarm signal action, after the elevator returns to
the fire station, there are two ways to enter the
firefighter: a, enter the firefighter operation by dialing
the fireman switch in the car operating pane; b, after
waiting (control time parameter) the firefighter
automatically enters the firefighter's operation after the
delay time. In the firefighter operating mode, there is
Firefighter Standard
44. no automatic door opening and closing action, and
only by constant pressure of the door button to operate
the door. At this time, the elevator only responds to the
Product Information
instructions in the car and eliminates all registered
calls after arriving at the station. Only when the
elevator is opened at the fire return floor, after the
above two switches are reset, the elevator can be reset
to normal operation.
The system judges the current height and speed of the
car through the high-speed counting terminal. If there
Encoder feedback is no encoder feedback during the running process, the Standard
45.
detection protection system automatically stops the car to prevent the configuration
topping caused by the failure of the encoder. The
failure of the bottom.
The system recognizes the direction by high-speed
counting, and judges the actual running direction of the
Reverse running Standard
46. car during operation. Once the running direction is
inconsistent with the command direction, the system
automatically stops the elevator.
Non-door zone can
The car is in the non-door zone area, it is forbidden to Standard
47. not open the door
open the door automatically. configuration
protection
Door zone signal In the automatic operation mode, the system does not
fault protection leave the leveling position within 5 seconds after the Standard
48.
elevator starts, and the system automatically stops the configuration
car.
-11-
Product Information

When the system is running, the position data of the
Automatically
car at the terminal door zone and each leveling switch Standard
49. correct the car shaft
operation point are corrected by the position data configuration
height
obtained during shaft self-learning.
In the automatic operation mode, the system corrects
the current speed of the elevator according to the
terminal slowdown limit switch action. When the low
Terminal slowdown speed terminal slowdown limit switch is operated, and Standard
50.
limit function the current speed of the elevator exceeds the speed configuration
corresponding to the low speed terminal slowdown
limit, the elevator immediately stops. The
proterminalional value can be set by parameters.
Light load When the light load switch is activated, the number of
Function
51. anti-nuisance commands in the car exceeds the set value, and all car
selection
function calls are eliminated after the system runs once.
After this function is turned on, the number of
Light curtain commands in the car exceeds the set value. If the light
Function
52. anti-nuisance curtain does not move after the system stops, the last
selection
function specified car call will run and clear other redundant
commands.
The test run is used for the fatigue test run of the new
Function
53. Test run elevator. The parameters are set and the elevator will
selection
start running randomly.
Standard
54. Fault History The system can record 40 recent faults.
configuration
Product Information
The system can perform leveling fine-tuning by setting

Leveling parameters for the up-level deviation and the Standard
55.
fine-tuning down-level deviation of each floor. The default is 200 setting
(range: 0-400mm).
Programmable By setting parameters, you can customize the input Function
56.
input points signal function of the control board. selection
When the input signal point defined as thermal
protection is activated, the elevator will stop at the
Motor overheat closest floor. When the input to the thermal protection Standard
57.
protection input signal point is reset, after the time delay of the configuration
parameter thermal protection, the elevator resumes
normal operation.
The seismic operation of this system has two modes:
slight earthquake and earthquake. When the input
Earthquake Standard
58. signal point defined as an earthquake activated, the
Operation setting
elevator will stop at the closes floor and opens the
door.
Programmable The board output signal function can be defined by Function
59.
Output Point setting a parameter group. selection
Brake voltage The time of the brake voltage switching control can be Function
60.
switching adjusted by parameters. selection
61. Car call cancel When the passenger presses the command button in the
Standard
car and finds that it does not match the actual request,
-12-
Product Information

the button can be pressed twice on the command setting
button, and the registered signal is cancelled.
By dialing the independent running switch in the car,
Independent the system enters the dedicated operation mode: At this Standard
62.
operation time, the elevator does not accept the hall call configuration
registration.
When the system is running under non-attendant
operation, the elevator will automatically open the
Door open time Standard
63. door. If there is no hall call signal registration at this
automatic control setting
level, you can modify the door open time by setting the
parameter to open the door delay.
When running in non-attendant operation, the
automatic parking delay is valid. When there is no Standard
64. Automatic parking
command, the elevator will automatically return to the configuration
parking floor after the parking timer expired.
When the elevator is stopped, the car interior lighting
When the elevator
and the fan will be automatically powered off after the
is stopped, the fan Standard
65. idle energy saving delay is set. When there is a
will automatically configuration
command response, the car interior lighting and fan are
turn off
automatically restored.
By setting the service floor parameter group, you can
Service floors arbitrarily set which landings the elevator stops, the Function
66.
setting door opening conditions, and which landings are not selection
stopped.
By setting the parameter group, you can arbitrarily set
Product Information
Floor display Function
67. the characters (English letters or specific symbols)
character setting selection
displayed on each floor.
Door lock open When the elevator detects that the door lock circuit is
Standard
68. during run opened during run, the system automatically stop the
configuration
protection car. At the same time, the door closing signal is output.
In the automatic operation mode, the door lock is
Door lock detected by the safety board bridge door circuit every
Standard
69. short-circuit time the door is opened. If the door circuit is
configuration
protection short-circuited, the system automatically fault out. (the
fault is manually repaired reset)
After the system enters the bypass operation, the
elevator only responds to the instruction of the
Door lock bypass inspection operation. The door lock circuit can select Standard
70.
function the bypass hall door or the car door through the bypass configuration
switch. During the elevator operation, the car top board
will emit an audible and visual alarm. prompt.
The manual door operation of this system is as follows:
The door open and closed limits are not detected.
Manual door The car can run sa long as the door lock is made. The Function
71. door lock must be opened once when stopped at a
function selection
landing.
The door is not detected. The can run as long as the
door lock is made. The door lock must be opened or
-13-
Product Information

after a 5 second delay when stopped at a landing.
Two operating modes. The corresponding functions
can be selected via manual door parameters.
When the function is activated, after the elevator opens
in the automatic mode, the system detects that the door
has not been automatically closed due to the light
Function
72. Nudging curtain being blocked. If the light curtain is
selection
continuously blocked for more than 3 minutes, the
system will issue a low speed closing signal. Perform a
door closing operation at reduce torque.
when the function parameter is selected, the buzzer Function
73. Car call Buzzer
will be activated when a car call is made. selection
When this function is activated, the system will
automatically start scanning from the lowest level hall
Hall call board
node of the front door, until the topmost hall node Standard
74. communication
ends, and then recirculate and scan from the back door; configuration
check
check whether the communication of each outer call
board is good.
During the elevator high speed operation, the system
detects that the wire rope is slipping. If the slippage
Wire rope slip Function
75. exceeds the warning value, the system will reterminal
monitoring selection
the slipping fault and prompt the installation of
maintenance personnel to check the elevator.
By the operator manually turning on the detection
function, the system will detect the relevant conditions
Product Information
and perform the brake torque detection; give the motor

Brake torque output 150% torque to check whether the traction Function
76.
detection sheave moves. If any part of the system is found to be selection
moving during the execution, the system will
automatically stop and trigger a fault. (the fault is
manually reset).
The torque boost function is manually turned on by the
operator. The system will detect the relevant
Function
77. Slip function test conditions and automatically enter the torque boost
selection
operation. The system will automatically exit this
operation after 30s.
The WDT protection is provided on the controller.
Controller CPU When a CPU fault is detected or the program is faulty, Standard
78.
WDT protection the WDT loop energizes the main controller output configuration
point OFF and resets the CPU.
The system has a real-time clock chip that can
Real-time clock Standard
79. guarantee 2 years of normal operation without user
management configuration
power.
-14-
Product Information
Optional function

After selecting this function, the controller must
receive the door zone signal, the door bridge board
confirmation, and the parameter re-leveling running
time is not zero. For high rise elevator, due to the With optional
Re-leveling with
1 expansion and contraction of the wire rope, the
door open operation K-SF1000
passenger will move up and down during the process
of entering and leaving the car, resulting in uneven
leveling. At this time, the system will re-level the car
at a lower speed while the door is opened.
After the UCMP function is selected, when the car
Unintentended car move outside the door zone with the door open, the With optional
2 movement system immediately trigger a fault and stops all
protection operations. This protection must be manually reset to K-SF1000
restore the elevator to normal.
After selecting this function, the controller must have a
power failure input signal. When the running car is not
in the door zone due to power failure of the building, With optional
3 Auto rescue system
the battery backup emergency leveling device will ARD/UPS
start, driving the elevator at low speed leveling to a
floor. Open the door and let the passengers exit.
When this function is selected, the lobby of each floor
is equipped with upper and lower arrival lanterns.
When the elevator is in the leveling process, the arrival With optional
4 Hall lanterns arrival lantern of the corresponding direction of the hall arrival
Product Information
landing station is output to inform the passenger that lanterns
the elevator is about to arrive and predict the direction
to be operated.
When this function is selected, the hall on each floor is
equipped with an electronic arrival gong. When the
elevator leveling into the door zone, the arrival gong
will start to sound. Through parameter selection: sound With optioal
5 Arrival gong
once for up direction and twice for down direction, in arrival gong
order to inform the passenger that the elevator has
arrived and foreseen the direction of the upcoming
operation.
The car arrival gong will ring during the elevator
With optional
leveling into the door zone, to remind passengers in the
6 Car arrival gong car arrival
car and passengers outside the hall to arrive at the
gong
elevator immediately.
When this function is selected, the voice annunication
With optional
Voice annunication will broadcast the current floor when it enters the door
7 voice
function every time, and the direction of operation will be
annunication
broadcasted every time it runs.
When the elevator car has front and rear doors, the rear With optional
Rear door car door car operating panel can be selected. The rear ar
8 operating panel configuration of the rear door car operating panel and operating
operation the main car operating panel are the same. When the panel
front and rear doors of a certain floor can open the
-15-
Product Information

door, press the door opening button of the rear door car
operating panel to open the rear door; press the door
opening button of the front door car operating panel to
open the front door. The instruction in the rear door car
operating panel corresponds to opening the rear door;
the instruction in the front door car operating panel
corresponds to opening the front door. Both the front
and the rear doors have instructions to register, and
both doors are open.
There are two ways to control the front and rear doors
independently: 1. The front and rear doors have
independent operation when there is a rear door car
operating panel (described in the operation of the rear
door operation box). 2. The front and rear doors are
independently operated when the rear car operating
panel is selected: When the car call is registered, the With optional
Independent control
elevator only opens the rear door after the leveling: rear ar
9 of front and rear
When registering through the front operating panel, the operating
doors
elevator only opens the front door after the leveling: panel
the front and rear car calls are registered, after the
elevator leveling, both the front and rear doors are
opened. Similarly, when the door is opened at this
level, press the rear door open button, open the back
door: press the front door open button to open the front
door.
Through Ethernet real-time monitoring of the floor
With optional
position, running direction and fault status of the
Product Information
10 Remote monitoring K-N100 and

on-site elevator can be viewed in the remote
PC software
monitoring center.
When the elevator is in the disabled operation, a
disable person call button is required outside the hall
and in the car. The regular person registers the call and
presses the door to open the door and to close the door
(the time for opening the door is short). For the
disabled person registers the call and closes the door
according to the opening time of the disabled person
(the time for opening the door is long). The registration
With optional
of disabled persons in the car will be accompanied by a
dsiable call
Operation of buzzer to indicate that the disabled person has been
11 K-PI1000 and
disabled persons registered, and the door button of the disabled person
car call
is closed according to the opening time of the disabled
K-CC1000
person; the registration of the disabled person outside
the hall is accompanied by the button registration. The
buzzer will beep once, and the buzzer will beep twice
when registering the lower button; For duplex
operation, the disable hall call will not be part of the
duplex dispatching system. If you need the voice
function, you can add a voice annunication to notify
the disabled to use the elevator.
12 Duplex operation Duplex operation means that two systems transmit data Configuration
through serial communication via CAN terminal to Two control
-16-
Product Information

realize the coordination function of each elevator in systems
each elevator, thus improving the operating efficiency
of the elevator. Set the parameter elevator group
number (1 is the main car, 2 is the auxiliary car), and
all registered call signals are reasonably allocated by
the main car according to the distance principle.
The system has built-in group control, and the control
system can coordinate up to 6 elevators. Set the
parameter elevator group number (1 is the main Configure
elevator, 2~6 is the auxiliary elevator). In the group
Group control Multiple
13 control, the fuzzy control algorithm is used to calculate
operation control
which elevator will respond most quickly and
reasonably to each call. This greatly improves the systems
transportation efficiency of the elevator and reduces
the waiting time of passengers.
Product Information
-17-
Product Information
1.6. Product Specifications

Various model specifications
Voltage class 200V (Three phase)
Model:K-MC1000 2R2G 3R7G 5R5G 7R5G 011G 015G 018G 022G 030G
Maximum applicable
2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30
motor capacity (kW)
Input Current (A) 11 17 26 34 41 49 62 82 111
Rated output capacity
4.2 6.7 9.5 12.6 17.9 17.9 23 32 44
(kVA)
Rated output current
9.6 14.0 24 31 39 45 60 85 115
(A)
Overload tolerance 150% / 1min
Carrier frequency (kHz) 4-16

Power supply capacity
5.8 9.5 14 18 24 30 36 47 51
(kVA)
Voltage class 400V(Three phase)
Model:K-MC1000 5R5G 7R5G 011G 015G 018G 022G 030G 037G 045G 055G 075G
Maximum applicable
5.5 7.5 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55 75
motor capacity (kW)
Input Current (A) 14.8 20.5 25.8 33.8 41 47 62 75 90 113 150
Product Information
Rated output capacity

11.3 13.7 18.3 24 30 34 48 57 69 85 114
(kVA)
Rated output current
13 18 24 31 39 45 60 72 88 110 148
(A)
10s 180 200 170 180 200 176
Overload tolerance % % % % % %
1min
150% / 1min
Overload tolerance
Carrier frequency (kHz) 4-16
Power supply capacity
8.9 11.0 17.0 21.0 24.0 30.0 40.0 65 78.5 96 129
(kVA)
General specifications
Features Descriptions
Input/Output Three phase AC 220V~240V -15~10%
Input voltage range
Features Three phase AC 380V~440V -15~10%
Input frequency range 47～63Hz
Output voltage range 0～rated input voltage
Output Frequency
0～400Hz
range
-18-
Product Information
Features Descriptions
Peripheral Low voltage input 25 low voltage inputs，DC 24V/5mA
interface
characteristics High voltage input 3 high voltage inputs，AC/DC 110V ±15%
Relay output 7 relay outputs，DC30V/5A,AC250V/5A
CAN communication
3 independent CAN communication terminals
terminal
Encoder terminal Sine and cosine, incremental encoder interface
Technical Control method PG vector control
performance Starting torque PG vector control：0Hz/180%
characteristics
Speed control
PG vector control：±0.1% Maximum speed
accuracy
Carrier frequency 1.0kHz～16.0kHz
Functional High speed mode, inspection mode, leveling mode,
Operating mode
characteristics re-leveling mode, UPS mode
Stopping method Real-time generation of running curves with direct to floor
Two independent adjustment methods: speed loop and
Starting torque
position loop
compensation
Smooth start without weighing device
Motor self-learning
Static self-learning
method
Shaft self-learning Accurately record floor position and terminal slowdown
method limit switch position
Automatic voltage Automatically keeps the output voltage constant when the
adjustment grid voltage changes
Operation and It consists of 3 digital LEDs, 6 indicator lights and 3
monitoring buttons;
Product Information
Onboard operator
Functions: fault inquiry, manual call, shaft self-learning,
parameter monitoring and other operations.
Handheld operator It can perform parameter setting, fault inquiry, manual call
(optional) and other operations.
Parameter setting and uploading and downloading, fault
PC software query,
Manual call, curve monitoring and other operations.
Surroundings Ambient temperature -10 ° C ~ 40 ° C (up 1 ° C, derating 4%)
Altitude 1000m (up 1000m, derating 10%)
Relative humidity 35～85% RH, no condensation
Anti-vibration and
Less than 5.8m/S2 (0.6g)
shock
Non-corrosive gas, non-flammable gas, not direct sunlight,
Working environment
Conductive dust is not serious, no oil mist, steam, salt
-19-
Mechanical installation
2 Mechanical installation
2.1. Installation conditions

Caution
In order to give full play to the performance of the product, long-term to maintain its function, the
installation environment is very important. Install the machine in the environment shown in the table
below.
Guidance
Installation site Indoor
Ambient -10℃ ~ +50℃
temperature In order to improve the reliability of the machine, please use in a place where the
temperature will not change drastically.
When using in a confined space, use a cooling fan or cooling air conditioner to
cool it to prevent the internal temperature from exceeding the ambient
temperature.
Avoid freezing the inverter.
Humidity 95RH% or less (no condensation)
Working  Please install the inverter in the following places:
environment  No oil mist, corrosive gases, flammable gases, dust and other places
 Metal powder, oil, water and other foreign objects will not enter the
inverter's internal place.
 (Do not install the inverter on flammable materials such as wood)
 No radioactive material, flammable materials place
 No harmful gas and liquid places
 Salt corrosion less places
 No direct sunlight place
Altitude Below 1000m. Derating required when above 1000m

Vibration < 5.8m/s2
Installation
Please be sure to install vertically.
direction
Prohibited
 Do not install any equipment that generates electromagnetic waves or interference such as
transformers around the machine; otherwise, the machine may malfunction. To install this type of
equipment, a shield should be placed between it and the machine.
 To prevent foreign objects from entering during operation, install the upper part of the machine
with cloth or paper to prevent metal chips, oil, water from entering the machine during drilling. Be
sure to remove the cloth or paper when the job is finished. If you continue to cover the above, it
will make the ventilation worse, resulting in abnormal heat machine.
 Please avoid the place with oil mist and dust suspension, install the machine in the clean place or
the enclosed cabinet, the control cabinet that the suspended objects can not enter. When installed in
the cabinet, please select the cooling method and the size of the control cabinet to ensure that the
ambient temperature of the machine is within the allowable temperature range. Also, do not install
the machine on flammable materials such as wood.
-20-
2.2. Installation space

 Installation direction of Fusion  Installation space of Fusion
In order not to reduce the cooling effect of the To ensure the ventilation and wiring space
machine, be sure to carry out the longitudinal required for machine cooling, be sure to observe
installation. the installation conditions listed below. Close the
back of the machine to the wall of the cabinet so
that the cooling air flowing around the heat sink
flows smoothly to ensure the cooling effect.
2.3. Shape & Mounting Dimensions
K-MC1000 ModelⅠ:
200V Class 2.2kW～15kW
400V Class 5.5kW～18.5kW
-21-
K-MC1000 ModelⅡ
200V Class 18.5kW
400V Class 22kW～30kW
K-MC1000 ModelⅢ
200V Class 22kW~30kW
400V Class 37kW～75kW

W H D W1 H1 d Gross
Type Model
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) weight (kg)
K-MC1000-2R2G-2 210 330 167 160 316 8 7.6 Ⅰ
K-MC1000-3R7G-2 210 330 167 160 316 8 7.6
K-MC1000-5R7G-2 210 330 167 160 316 8 7.6
K-MC1000-7R5G-2 210 330 167 160 316 8 7.6
K-MC1000-011G-2 210 330 190 160 316 8 8.3
K-MC1000-015G-2 210 330 190 160 316 8 8.3
K-MC1000-018G-2 256 357 219 188 341 8 13.5 Ⅱ
K-MC1000-022G-2 385 555 337 310 533 12 36 Ⅲ
K-MC1000-030G-2 385 555 337 310 533 12 39
-22-
W H D W1 H1 d Gross
Type Model
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) weight (kg)
K-MC1000-5R5G-4 210 330 167 160 316 8 7.6 Ⅰ
K-MC1000-7R5G-4 210 330 167 160 316 8 7.6
K-MC1000-011G-4 210 330 167 160 316 8 7.6
K-MC1000-015G-4 210 330 167 160 316 8 7.6
K-MC1000-018G-4 210 330 190 160 316 8 8.3
K-MC1000-022G-4 256 357 219 188 341 8 13.5 Ⅱ
K-MC1000-030G-4 256 357 219 188 341 8 13.5
K-MC1000-037G-4 385 555 337 310 533 12 36 Ⅲ
K-MC1000-045G-4 385 555 337 310 533 12 36
K-MC1000-055G-4 385 555 337 310 533 12 39
K-MC1000-075G-4 385 555 337 310 533 12 39
Attention
When designing the control cabinet layout, consider leaving the appropriate wiring margin for the left
and right outlet terminals of the integrated controller.
-23-
Electrical installation
3 Electrical installation
3.1. Precautions
Danger
In order to prevent electric shock

Do not perform wiring work with the power turned on. Please turn off the power of all devices before
checking. There is residual voltage in the internal capacitor even when the power is turned off. The
waiting time after the power is turned off should not be shorter than the time indicated on the
K-MC1000.
Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock.
Attention
Safety measures when starting the elevator

 Please correctly connect the running/stop circuit and the safety circuit, and confirm that the
machine is in the normal operation after the unit is powered on.
If the wiring is wrong, it may cause a personal accident due to the sudden start of the elevator.
 After the emergency stop circuit is wired, be sure to check if it is working properly.
In order for the integrated machine to perform the stop operation safely and quickly, it is
necessary to provide an emergency stop circuit. If you use an emergency stop circuit that has not
been confirmed by operation, there is a danger of personal injury.
 Before the test run, please confirm the input and output signals and external sequence control of
the K-MC1000.
If it is neglected, it may lead to personal accidents.
 When running the synchronous motor for the first time, and when replacing the K-MC1000 or
synchronous motor, set the correct motor parameters to the K-MC1000 before running, and be
sure to check the motor speed.
Otherwise, the motor will be driven by the load due to insufficient torque or the motor will not
follow the command (reverse, immovable, sudden acceleration, etc.).

In order to prevent electric shock
 Do not operate with the unit cover removed. In order to illustrate the details of the product, the
illustrations in this specification are sometimes in the operation of removing the cover or safety
cover. Be sure to run the K-MC1000 in accordance with the instruction manual with the
specified cover or cover installed.
 Be sure to ground the ground terminal on the motor side.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or fire due to contact with the motor casing.
 Remove metal objects such as watches and rings before performing maintenance checks and
parts replacement on the K-MC1000. Please try not to wear loose clothes and protect your eyes
with goggles.
There is a danger of electric shock or injury.
 Installation, wiring, repair, inspection, and component replacement should be performed by an
electrical construction professional who is familiar with the installation, adjustment, and repair
of the K-MC1000.
 Make sure that the protective grounding conductor meets the requirements of technical standards
and local safety standards.
When an EMC noise filter is installed, the leakage current will exceed 3.5mA. Therefore,
-24-
according to the IEC/EN 61800-5 standard, an automatic power cut-off device must be provided
to prevent the ground conductor from being disconnected. The protective earthing conductor
must use a car operating panelper wire with a section of 10 mm2 or an aluminum wire with a
section of 16 mm2.
 Be sure to ground the ground terminal. (200V class: grounding resistance is below 100Ω, 400V
class: grounding resistance is below 10Ω).
Improper grounding can result in death or serious injury from contact with ungrounded electrical
equipment.
 Do not remove the cover of the K-MC1000 or touch the printed circuit board while the power is
on.
3.2. Fusion parts descriptions

Onboard man-
machine
interface Operator Port
Program
Interface
PC
Input Interface
signal
High-
port voltage
detection
Input signal port
Indicator light
Communication
port
Power port
Output port
Main circuit
terminal block Encoder port
3.3. Wiring instructions

3.3.1 Input power R、S、T
 On the input side of the K-MC1000, there is no phase sequence requirement.
 The specifications and installation methods of external power wiring must comply with
local regulations and relevant IEC standards.
 The filter should be installed close to the input terminals of the controller, and the
connection cable between them should be less than 30cm. The ground terminal of the filter
and the ground terminal of the controller are connected together and the filter is mounted on
-25-
the same conductive mounting plane as the controller. The conductive mounting plane is
connected to the main ground of the cabinet.
3.3.2 DC bus（＋）、（-）
 Note that after the power failure, the DC bus (+) and (-) terminals have residual voltage.
After 10 minutes of power failure, confirm that the controller voltage is lower than DC36V,
the wiring operation can be performed, otherwise there is danger of electric shock.
 Do not connect the braking resistor directly to the DC bus, which may cause damage to the
K-MC1000 or even fire.
3.3.3 Brake resistor connection terminal（+）、PB

 Brake resistor selection reference recommended value and wiring distance should be less
than 5m. Doing so may cause damage to the K-MC1000.
3.3.4 K-MC1000 output sideU、V、W

 External power wiring specifications and installation methods need to comply with local
regulations and relevant IEC standards.
 It is strictly forbidden to connect capacitors or surge absorbers on the output side of the
K-MC1000. Because the output of the elevator unit has higher harmonics, if the output side
is connected to a capacitor or a surge absorber, the unit will be overheated or damaged.
 When the motor cable is too long, it is easy to generate electrical resonance due to the
influence of distributed capacitance, which may cause motor insulation damage or large
leakage current to make the integrated machine overcurrent protection. When the motor
cable length is greater than 100m, an AC output reactor must be installed near the unit.
 It is recommended to use a shielded wire for the output motor cable. The shield is connected
to the ground wire.
 The motor cable shield lead wire should be as short as possible and the width should be no
less than 1/5 length.
-26-
3.3.5 Ground terminal （PE）

 The terminals must be reliably grounded and the grounding wire resistance must be less than
10Ω. Failure to do so may result in abnormal or even damage to the equipment.
 Do not share the ground terminal with the power neutral N terminal.
 The impedance of the protective earthing conductor must be sufficient to withstand the large
short-circuit currents that may occur in the event of a fault.
 The size of the protective earthing conductor is selected according to the table below.
Grounding cross-sectional area
Cross-sectional area of one phase line（S） Minimum cross-sectional area of

protective conductor（Sp）
S ≤16mm2 S
16mm2＜S≤35mm2 16mm2
S＞35mm2 S/2
 The protective earthing conductor must be a yellow-green cable.

 The controller is recommended to be mounted on a conductive metal mounting surface to
ensure that the entire conductive bottom of the controller is well overlapped with the
mounting surface.
 The filter should be installed on the same mounting surface as the controller to ensure the
filtering effect of the filter.
3.3.6 Control circuit terminal wiring instructions

1) Cable selection for control loop
 0.75mm2 car operating panelper wire is recommended for all control cable wiring.
2) Control circuit wiring requirements
 The motor cable should be routed away from all control cables.
 It is recommended that the motor cable, input power cable, and control loop cable are not in
the unified cable trough. Avoid the long distance between the motor cable and the control
loop and the travel line, and the electromagnetic interference generated by the coupling.
 When the control loop and the drive line must cross, the angle of intersection should be 90
degrees.
 Refer to the following figure for the recommended cable layout:
3.3.7 CAN communication wiring instructions

1) Cable selection requirements
 Select twisted pair cable, power cable (DC24V+, DC24V-) is a set of twisted pair, CAN
communication line (CNAH, CANL) is a set of twisted pair;
 CAN communication line must be twisted pair, the lay length is between 20mm~30mm;
 Under normal circumstances, the cross-sectional area is 0.75 mm2;
 In the case of high-speed and long-distance transmission, it is not recommended to select a
shielded cable. The transmission delay of the shielded cable is relatively large, affecting the
transmission distance and communication rate. However, cables with different wire
diameters have little effect on the CAN transmission distance.
2) Control circuit wiring requirements
-27-
 Prevent short circuit between DC24V+, DC24V-, CANH, CANL and other cables. Before
powering up, you must use a multimeter to check for short circuits between the four cables
and other cables.
 The communication line and power line must be strictly separated. If the strong wire is
routed in parallel with the weak wire, the strong wire must be distributed on one side and the
weak wire on the other side. The strong wire and the weak wire must be separated by a
ground wire.
 Ground the accompanying cable.
 In the case of high floors (25 floors or more) or other places that cause a large voltage drop
in the circuit, measures should be taken to reduce the voltage drop to ensure that the
far-reaching power supply voltage farthest from the control cabinet is not less than 20V.
Attention
 When wiring, please strictly follow the terminal label wiring. When wiring, shorten the length of
the line as much as possible to avoid leakage and cause instability.
 CAN bus plugs (24V+, 24V-, CANH, CANL) are forbidden to be plugged and unplugged,
otherwise permanent damage to the device may occur.
 The CAN communication power supply line is dedicated to the 24V power supply of the
controller and must not be used for any other purpose. It must not be connected to other loads.
3) Common problems and handling of CAN communication site

[Q1] Check if the matching resistance is correct or not
 All equipment is powered off. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between CANH and
CANL at either end of the CAN communication network. It should be around 60Ω. If it is too
small, it means that not only the matching resistors are connected to the two ends, but also in
other locations. If there is an error, disconnect the matching resistor that is incorrectly connected.
[Q2] Evaluating communication cables
 The cable must be twisted pair, and the cross-sectional area of the line meets the minimum
wire diameter of 0.75mm2;
 The cable must be routed as required.
[Q3] Confirm whether the non-customer non-standard special agreement
 Contact us to confirm whether it is a non-standard proprietary agreement for customers.
3.3.8 Grounding instructions

 Be sure to ground the grounding terminal of the control cabinet.
 Do not share the grounding wire with power equipment.
 The motor casing must be grounded and connected directly to the power ground PE and
must not be connected to the cabinet.
 The ground wire should not be less than 4mm2, and the high-power motor should be
thickened.
 The control cabinet must be grounded and connected directly to the power ground PE.
 The hall door grounding wire and the car grounding wire can be connected to the grounding
pile head of the control cabinet.
-28-
 The outer panel metal panel must be grounded to prevent static electricity from damaging
the device or causing interference when the weather is dry.
 Use the specifications specified in the electrical equipment technical standard for the
grounding wire to shorten the wiring as much as possible.
 When using multiple control cabinets, do not connect the ground wire into a loop, as shown
in the figure below.
Correct connection Wrong connection
3.3.9 Wiring check
NO. Content
□ 1. Is the K-MC1000 model consistent with the ordered product?
□ 2. Are the models and quantities of peripheral devices (brake resistors, DC reactors,
noise filters, energy feedback units, etc.) consistent with the ordered products?
□ 3. Is the optional card model the same as the ordered product?
□ 4. Is the installation location and installation method of the K-MC1000 correct?
□ 5. Is the power supply voltage within the range of the input voltage specifications of
the K-MC1000?
□ 6. Is the rated voltage of the motor consistent with the output specifications of the
K-MC1000?
□ 7. Is the rating correct?
□ 8. Is the power supply input through the wiring breaker and is the rated value of the
wiring breaker correct?
□ 9. Is the power wiring correctly connected to the input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
of the K-MC1000?
□ 10. Is the motor wiring connected to the output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) in phase
sequence?
□ 11. Is the motor output line more than 50 meters? If it is more than necessary to reduce
the carrier frequency parameter value?
□ 12. Is the power supply and motor wires using 600V vinyl wires?
□ 13. Is the main circuit wire size suitable?
□ 14. Is the brake resistor wiring correct? Is the resistance value appropriate?
□ 15. Is the grounding wire set correctly?
□ 16. Is the screw of the main circuit terminal and ground terminal of the K-MC1000
fastened?
□ 17. Is the double-stranded shielded wire used in the control circuit wiring of the
-29-
K-MC1000?
□ 18. Is the shielded wire connected to the E(G) terminal?
□ 19. Is there any wrong wiring?
□ 20. Is the screw of the control circuit terminal securely fastened?
□ 21. Are there any wires, screws, etc. left?
□ 22. Is the wire of the terminal part in contact with the adjacent terminal?
□ 23. Is the wiring of the control circuit and the wiring of the main circuit separated in
the casing and the control cabinet?
□ 24. Is the shielded cable of the rotary encoder routed separately from the power line?
□ 25. When the machine room is configured, is the communication cable between the
controller and the driver far away from the power cable, and the distance is at least
50cm?
-30-
3.4. Main circuit port definition

200V:Models under 15KW(include15kW) 200V:Models above 15KW
400V:Models under 18.5KW(include18.5kW) 400V:Models above 18.5KW
Terminal Function Description Terminal Function Description
label label
R、S、T Three-Phase power input R、S、T Three-Phase power input
terminals terminals
－、＋ Braking unit terminals
B1、B2 Braking resistor terminals
+、BR Braking resistor terminals
U、V、W Three-Phase power output U、V、W Three-Phase power output
terminals terminals
PE or Ground terminal PE or Ground terminal
T1、T2 Motor thermistor terminals
-31-
3.5. PG card terminal definition

3.5.1. Encoder Model——LPG10
Encoder Model LPG10 Encoder Type Sin/Cos Type
PG Card Terminal Setting
D-TYPE SHIELD
PG card model : LPG10 Encoder model : Sin/Cos
Pin 1: B- 5a: B- HEIDENHAIN ERN1387
Pin 3: R+ 4b: R+
Pin 4: R- 4a: R-
Pin 5: A+ 6b: A+
LPG10 Pin 6: A- 2a: A-
Pin 7: 0 V 5b: 0 V
Pin 8: B+ 3b: B+
Pin 9: 5.6 V 1b: 5.6 V
Pin 10: C- 1a: C-
Pin 11: C+ 7b: C+
Pin 12: D+ 2b: D+
Pin 13: D- 6a: D-
FEMALE 15-Way D-Type
Indication
 LPG 10 card. Pins 2, 14, and Pin 15 are spares. Connect encoder cable to terminals as shown above.
3.5.2. Encoder Model——LPG07
Push-pull/Collector Differential
Encoder Model LPG07 Encoder Type
Output Incremental
PG Card Terminal Setting
PG card model：LPG07 Encoder type：

SHIELD Push-pull output incremental
LPG07
Pin 1: +12V +12V
Pin 2: GND GND
Pin 3: B-
Pin 4: B+ B
Pin 5: A-
Pin 6: A+ A
PG card model ：LPG07 Encoder type：

SHIELD Collector output increment type
LPG07
Pin 1: +12V +12V
Pin 2: GND GND
Pin 3: B- B
Pin 4: B+
Pin 5: A- A
Pin 6: A+
-32-
Push-pull/Collector Differential
Encoder Model LPG07 Encoder Type
Output Incremental
PG card model ：LPG07 Encoder type：

Differential output increment type
SHIELD
LPG07
Pin 1: +12V +12V
Pin 2: GND GND
Pin 3: B- B-
Pin 4: B+ B+
Pin 5: A- A-
Pin 6: A+ A+
Attention
 Encoder shield grounding instructions：
PG card model ：LPG07 Encoder
LPG07
Shield ground
Indication
 Connect to encoder model (Push pull / collector / differential output) and encoder cable correctly.
-33-
3.6. K-MC1000 control circuit terminal description

3.6.1. Control loop input terminal description (low voltage)
Default
Term Label Port Definition Terminal Function (Default)
Attribute
BB External Drive enable Normally open
Input method: open circuit
P1 Upper door zone signal Normally open
input photoelectric isolation
P2 Middle door zone signal Normally open
P3 Lower door zone signal Normally open Input voltage: 24Vdc
J4 P4 Low-speed down slowdown signal Normally close Input current: 5mA
P5 Low-speed up slowdown signal Normally close
P6 Down limit signal Normally close
P7 Up limit signal Normally close
P8 Pit inspection reset signal Normally open
P9 Reserved Normally open
P10 Run contactor monitor Normally close
P11 Brake contactor monitor Normally close
P12 Brake switch monitor Normally close
P13 Motor overheat protection signal Normally open
J5
Emergency electrical operation Normally close
P14
signal
P15 Inspection signal Normally close
P16 Inspection up signal Normally open
P17 Inspection down signal Normally open
P18 Reserved Normally open
P19 Door pre-opening signal Normally open
P20 Power off inspection signal Normally open
P21 Centralized fire signal Normally open
J6 P22 Brake traveling switch monitor 2 Normally close
P23 Bypass monitoring signal Normally close
P24 Pit inspection signal Normally close
V- Input signal common 24V- ——
V- Input signal common 24V- ——

3.6.2. Control circuit input terminal description (high voltage)
Default
Attribute
HC1 Common input ——
Input voltage: AC/DC
High voltage hall door lock Normally open
H1 110V±15%
monitoring signal
High voltage car door lock Normally open
J7 H2
monitoring signal
High voltage safety circuit Normally open
H3
monitoring signal
HC2 Common output ——
3.6.3. Control loop output terminal description
Default
Attribute
J8 T1 Run contactor output —— Output mode: relay output
-34-
Default
Attribute
Contact type: normally open
TC1 T1 common ——
type
T2 Brake contactor output —— Load voltage: AC 250Vac
DC 30Vdc
Load current: resistive load 5A
Emergency electrical operation
T3 ——
output
T4 Fire recall output ——
T5 Door re-leveling output ——
J9
T6 Low speed signal output ——
T7 UPS feedback output ——
3.6.4. Communication terminal description
Default
Attribute
CAL Car call CANL ——
Internal call CAN communication:
CAL & CAH
CAH Car call CANH ——
Hall call CAN communication: LDL
LDL Hall call CANL —— & LDH
Group Control CAN Communication:
LDH Hall call CANH —— GOL & GOH
J3
GOL Group control CANL ——
GOH Group control CANH ——
V- Car call CANL ——
PE Grounding signal ——
3.6.5. Control loop power terminal description
Default
Attribute
J11 24V+ DC 24V+ ——
-35-
Default
Attribute
24V- DC 24V- ——
PE Grounded ——
-36-
3.7. Split-one-Fusion input & out signal port
Onboard man-machine interface

J10 Operator Port
JP10
Program Interface
JP11
PC Interface
Input signal
Indicator light JP4
High Voltage input
Output signal
Indicator light
DB25 I/O board

connect port
Main circuit terminal

block Encoder port
Interface board
-37-
Term Label Port Definition Function

J1 —— CAN communication with inverter Internal communication
J2 —— Interface board connection All-in-one is connected to peripheral IO
J3 —— Interface board connection interface board
HC1 High voltage input common
H1 High voltage hall door lock signal
H2 High voltage car door lock signal For AC220V safety circuit, door lock
J4
H3 High voltage safety signal loop high voltage detection
H4 Spare high voltage signal
HC2 Common output
To prevent leakage and signal
J5 —— Ground terminal
interference
J10 —— Operator interface Elevator adjustment tools
J12 —— SD card storage For data analysis
Main processor programming Short terminal when updating main
JP1 M_BOOT
mode terminal processor software
JP2 —— Diagnostic termianl For internal use only
JP3 —— Main processor watchdog Program reset
Secondary processor programming Short terminal when updating
JP4 S_BOOT
mode terminal secondary processor software
JP5 —— Debug interface internal use
JP6 —— Secondary processor watchdog Program reset
JP7 —— Hall communication terminal Hall display boards communication
JP8 —— Car communication terminal Cartop and car board communication
Duplex/group communication Two elevators are connected in duplex
JP9 ——
terminal or in multiple elevators group
Secondary processor connection
JP10 —— Secondary processor program update
port
Main processor connector and PC Main processor program update and PC
JP11 ——
connection port software connection
-38-
Interface board port definition
J7 J6 J5 J4 J3 J2 J1 J0
J8 R06
C03 R04 R02 S1
C02
J30
C08
J9
R01 C01
J10
J11
R07
J18
J31
C04 S2 R03 R05 T01
J13
S3
C06 C07 C05 T02
J40
J12 J14 J15 J17 J19 J20
Term Label Port Definition Function Description Remarks

Fusion controller
J30 —— Use a DB25 cable
connection port IO interface board and Fusion
to connect to the
Fusion controller connection
J31 —— Fusion controller
connection port
Fusion controller Prevent leakage and signal
J40 ——
connection port interference
Map P25 indication on
PP1 Reserved input signal
K-MC1002C
PP2 Reserved input signal
K-MC1002C
J0 PP3 Reserved input signal
K-MC1002C
PP4 Pit inspection signal
K-MC1002C
Main board power supply
V- Input signal common Control cabinet
24V-
internal wiring port
V+
24V+
Control panel input power
V-
24V-
J1 PB Signal ground wire Prevent signal interference
External power supply
24V+
24V+
External input power
24V-
24V-
Map BB indication on
J2 BB Drive enable signal
K-MC1002C
-39-

PM1 Run contactor monitoring
K-MC1002C
Brake contactor Map P11 indication on
BRC
monitoring K-MC1002C
Safety board feedback Map P19 indication on
SAFE
signal K-MC1002C
BYPS Bypass input signal
K-MC1002C
INSP Emergency electric signal
K-MC1002C
INCT Inspection signal
K-MC1002C
CTU Inspection up signal
K-MC1002C
CTD Inspection down signal
K-MC1002C
V-
J3
V-
V- Main board power supply
Input signal common
V- 24V-
V-
V-
CAL1 Hardware cable -
CAL2 Hardware cable - Control cabinet
J4
CAL3 Hardware cable - intercom
ULM Upper door zone signal
K-MC1002C
DZ Door zone signal
K-MC1002C
J5 Map P3 indication on
DLM Lower door zone signal
K-MC1002C
V+
V+ External signal power 24V+
24V+
V+
Reserved for the second Control cabinet
UNT2 upper terminal limit internal wiring port
K-MC1002C
switch (P27)
Reserved for the second
DNT2 lower terminal limit
K-MC1002C
switch (P26)
V-
J6 V- Input signal common
24V-
V-
Power outage rescue Map P20 indication on
ARD
signal K-MC1002C
Duplex & group control Two elevators in
GOH -
CAN communication H duplex or multiple
Duplex & group control group control
GOL -
CAN communication L connection
V- Main board power supply Control cabinet
J7 Input signal common
V- 24V- internal wiring port
-40-

V-
V-
Brake travel switch Map P22 indication on
BKS2
monitor 2 K-MC1002C
Brake travel switch Map P12 indication on
BKS1
monitor 1 K-MC1002C
TL1 Hardware cable - Australia intercom
TL2 Hardware cable - dedicated
J8 FIR Fire return signal
K-MC1002C Control cabinet
Motor thermal protection Map P13 indication on external wiring port
KH
signal K-MC1002C
CAL3 Hardware cable - Monitoring room
J9
CAL2 Hardware cable - intercom
TS1 Hardware cable -
Australia
C100 Hardware cable -
J10 reservation line
N24 Hardware cable -
dedicated
L24 Hardware cable -
201 Hardware cable - Reserve power
J11
200 Hardware cable - connection
HS1 Hardware cable -
J18 Pit reserved line
A27 Hardware cable -
Safety circuit
connection
J13 A40 Hardware cable -
High-voltage public
HC2 Hardware cable -
output
A38 Hardware cable - Pan hand wheel
A35 Hardware cable - connected
J12
A34 Hardware cable - Speed limiter
A31 Hardware cable - connection
A22 Hardware cable - Safety circuit
A22 Hardware cable - monitoring
Car door lock
GS Hardware cable -
J14 monitoring
DLS Hardware cable -
Hall lock
monitoring
B10 Hardware cable - Door light curtain
B20 Hardware cable - power
Car top reserve line
J15 200 Hardware cable -
201 Hardware cable - Car top lighting
ML Hardware cable - power
MN Hardware cable -
HC1 Hardware cable - High-voltage public
-41-

input
GS Hardware cable - Control panel high
J17 DLS Hardware cable - voltage port
Map T1 indication on
T1 Run contactor output
K-MC1002C
TC1 T1 output common -
T2 Brake contactor output
J19 K-MC1002C
T3 Emergency power output
K-MC1002C
T4 Fire return output Control cabinet
K-MC1002C
internal wiring port
Re-level with door open Map T5 indication on
T5
output K-MC1002C
J20
T6 Low-speed signal output
K-MC1002C
T7 UPS feedback output
K-MC1002C
DNTD Down limit signal
K-MC1002C
UNTD Up limit signal
K-MC1002C
S1

K-MC1002C
V- Input signal common
24V-
A22 Hardware cable - Internal test
S2 GS Hardware cable - connection
S3 A34 Hardware cable -
Car call CAN
CANH3 -
communication H
Car call CAN
CANL3 - Car communication
C01 communication L
connection
PB Signal ground wire -
24V- -
24V-
-42-

24V+ -
24V+
Car top intercom
BZ Hardware cable - Car top alarm signal
C02
DZ Door zone signal
K-MC1002C
Map P1 indication on Car top leveling
ULM Upper door zone signal
K-MC1002C sensor
DLM Lower door zone signal
K-MC1002C
INCT4 Pit inspection signal
K-MC1002C
K-MC1002C Car top inspection
Map P16 indication on connection
K-MC1002C
C03
K-MC1002C
V- -
24V- Car top signal
Main board power supply power
V+ -
24V+
Safety circuit
C04 A40 Hardware cable -
connection
200 Hardware cable -
201 Hardware cable - Car top lighting
C05 ML Hardware cable - power
MN Hardware cable -
PE Ground wire - Car top ground wire
A22 Hardware cable - Car door lock
GS Hardware cable - circuit
C06
Car door grounding
PE Ground wire -
wire
B10 Hardware cable -
Car top door light
B20 Hardware cable -
curtain power
C07 supply
Door machine
PE Ground wire -
ground wire
L24 Hardware cable -
N24 Hardware cable -
Australia
C100 Hardware cable -
C08 reservation line
TL1 Hardware cable -
dedicated
TL2 Hardware cable -
-43-

GS Hardware cable -
Hall lock circuit
T01
Hall door
PE Ground wire -
grounding wire
GS Hardware cable -
Hall lock circuit
T02
Hall door
PE Ground wire -
grounding wire
Hall call CAN
CANH2 -
communication H
Hall call CAN
CANL2 -
communication L Outdoor display
PB Signal ground wire - board
R01
External power supply communication
24V- -
24V- connection
24V+ -
24V+
24V-
The first upper terminal Map P5 indication on
UNT1
limit switch (P27) K-MC1002C Upper terminal
R02 Reserved for the second limit switch
UNT2 upper terminal limit connection
K-MC1002C
switch (P27)
UNTD Up limit signal
K-MC1002C
A31 Hardware cable - Terminal limit
R03 A32 Hardware cable - switch connection
PE Ground wire - Shaft ground wire
24V-
The first lower terminal Map P4 indication on
DNT1
limit switch (P27) K-MC1002C Lower terminal
R04 Reserved for the second limit switch
DNT2 lower terminal limit connection
K-MC1002C
switch (P26)
DNTD Down limit signal
K-MC1002C
200 Hardware cable - Pit lighting power
201 Hardware cable - supply
R05 A46 Hardware cable - Pit safety circuit
PE Ground wire - Pit ground wire
Pit intercom
R06
BZ Hardware cable - Pit alarm signal
INCT4 Pit inspection signal Map P24 indication on Pit inspection
-44-

K-MC1002C connection
K-MC1002C
K-MC1002C
RESET Pit reset signal
K-MC1002C
- - -
R07 HS1 Hardware cable - Pit reserved wire
-45-
3.8. Terminal limits position map
Leveling plate
Door zone sensor
Reference point 1 Top floor low speed limit switch

Mounting position
Low speed up Reference distance (L1)
limit switch
Top floor forced
Medium speed up speed limit switch
limit switch Mounting position
Reference distance
Top floor (L2)
Intermediate floor
Leveling Plate
Door zone sensor
Medium speed down Basement Medium

limit switch speed limit switch
Mounting position
Low speed down Reference distance
limit switch (L2)

Reference Basement Low speed limit
point 2 switch Mounting position
Ground floor Reference distance (L2)
Elevator shaft pit
Deceleration switch position

Distance Car
(m) speed 1.0m/s 1.5 m/s 1.6 m/s 1.75 m/s 2.0 m/s 2.5 m/s
Strong reduction switch
Low speed terminal slowdown
limit switch installation (L1) 1.2～2.0 2.2～2.6 2.2～2.6 2.2～2.6 2.2～2.6 2.2～2.6
Medium speed terminal
slowdown limit switch —— —— —— —— 3.4～4.0 4.9～5.6
installation (L2)
-46-
Accessories
4 Accessories
4.1. Simplex standard configuration
s
s u
u b N
Power supply b n A
n o
o ti C
ti a e
c
a i id
c
i n st
Wiring circuit n f u u
breaker (MCCB) u o m lo
m ro m la
or leakage m ra o
o c H
circuit breaker Surge suppressor c C
N
A
C
Electromagnetic r&
a
contactor (MC) c
PG interface
AC reactor
Ground
Zero phase
reactor Brake resistor or brake
resistor unit
Note:
Fuse B1 B2(18.5kW below，
with 18.5kW)
+ BR(18.5kW above)
Input side
(primary side)
noise filter
r
so
s
Accessories
e
r
p
p
u
s
Output side e
rg
(secondary side) u
S
noise filter
Electromagnetic
contactor
Zero phase
reactor
Motor
Ground
-47-
Accessories
Controller Controller Controller

No. Controller name
name name name
Choose from motor parameters, elevator load,
elevator speed, and installation requirements:
Elevator 1) K-MC1000 voltage level (200V/400V)
1. integration K-MC1000 2) K-MC1000 power (2.2kW ~ 30kW)
Controller 3) K-MC1000 installation (organic room /
machine room)
Configuration instructions: 1 set per elevator
The controller integrates a front door and a rear
Car top door control system;
2. K-CT1000
controller Configuration instructions: 1 set per elevato
The controller integrates 16-level command
control functions, and the command control
Car board does not need to be added when the total
3. K-CC1000
controller number of elevators does not exceed 16 layers.
Configuration instructions: 1 set per car
operating panel
Car Scalable 8-layer instruction control
command Configuration instructions: Configure as
4. extension K-CI1000 required
control
panel
7-inch multimedia color display CAR
OPERATING PANEL&LOP controller
K-06T
Configuration instructions: Configure as
required
4.3 inch true color display CAR OPERATING
PANEL&LOP controller
K-03T Configuration instructions: Configure as
required
CAR High density LED display
OPERATI K-PI1100 Configuration instructions: configure as
Accessories
NG required
5.
PANEL & LED dot matrix display
LOP
Configuration instructions: configure as
Controller required
K-PI1200
LED segment code display

Configuration instructions: configure as
K-PI1300 required
Voice Multi- voice Voice annunication controller

announcem Configuration instructions: Configure as
6. MC-VAB
ent station required
Controlle
-48-
Accessories
4.2. Parallel elevator configuration

The K-MC1000 elevator integrated
control system is compatible with the
parallel elevator control function, so there
is no need to add any configuration when
two elevators are connected in parallel.
Use two CAN communication twisted
pair cables to connect the two elevator
control systems, and enable the elevator
parallel function.
CAN通讯连接电缆
4.3. Peripheral accessories selection

Name & Model & Name & Model & Shape Name & Model &
NO.
Shape Shape
Car controller Front door & rear door machine control Each elevator is
K-CT1000 system equipped with a car
 Monitor front door & rear door system top controller.
status
 Intelligent control car lighting & fan
system (normally closed contact control)
 Station bell signal control (normally
1. open contact control)
 Monitor car weighing switch signal
 Extended communication door control
interface (function reserved)
 Extended intercom, emergency power
supply, CAN communication interface
 Car top adjustments and SD card
expansion function
Accessories
Car controller  Integrated 16-layer car selection Configure according
K-CC1000 command button function to the number of car
 Integrated car door opening & closing operating paneles.
input button For example, when
 Integrated joystick switch function using a single door &
 Extended intercom, emergency power single car operating
2.
supply, CAN communication interface panel, configure one
 Car top adjustments and SD card car controller; when
expansion function double door & double
car operating panel,
configure two car
controllers.
Car instruction  Single board expandable 8-layer car Configure according
expansion board selection command button to your needs
K-CI1000  Four-wire configuration Note: This expansion
3. board needs to be
equipped with
adedicated connection
cable (model CABLE
-49-
Accessories
NO.
Shape Shape
2*8_100mm).
Command board  Connect the car command extension Configure according
dedicated connection board dedicated cable. to your needs.
cable
4. CABLE 2*8_100mm
CAR OPERATING 7-inch multimedia color display Configure according

PANEL & LOP  Advertising map play, date & time to your needs.
controller display, Logo
K-06T  Horizontal or vertical display mode
 SD card online update picture
5.
 Supterminal Office for Outer call &
elevator status display.
 Supterminal direction prediction &
out-of-office to station ring output
function.
CAR OPERATING Ultra-thin CAR OPERATING PANEL & Configure according
PANEL & LOP LOP controller. to your needs.
controller  4.3-inch true color display (Logo &
K-03T scroll arrows).
 Horizontal or vertical display mode.
6.  The SD card updates the picture online.
 Supterminal Office for Outer call &
elevator status display.
 Supterminal direction prediction &
out-of-office to station ring output
function.
CAR OPERATING  - High density LED display Configure according
PANEL & LOP  - Support horizontal & vertical display to your needs.
controller  - Support simplified, traditional and
7. K-PI1100 English display
 - Ultra-thin, suitable for wall mounting
Accessories
CAR OPERATING  - LED dot matrix display Configure according

PANEL & LOP  - Ultra-thin, suitable for wall mounting to your needs.
controller
K-PI1200
8.
CAR OPERATING  - LED segment code display Configure according

PANEL & LOP  - Ultra-thin, suitable for wall mounting to your needs.
9.
controller
K-PI1300
-50-
Accessories
NO.
Shape Shape
Voice announcement  Compatible with MP3, WAV and other Configure according
controller audio formats. to your needs.
MC-VAB  Background music playback function.
10.
Elevator releveling Elevator re-leveling & early opening Configure according

controller function. to your needs.
11. K-SF1000 UCMP function.
Handheld operator Connect the handheld operator to the Configure according

connection cable controller communication cable to your needs.
12. USB2.0-MinB 1.5m Standard configuration length 1.5m
4.4. PG card configuration
LPG10
Synchronous motor
LPG10 configuration
Accessories
sin/cos type encoder
DB15_母头
FEMALE 15-Way D-Type
LPG07 Asynchronous motor

configuration
LPG07 Push-pull/open collector
output Incremental
encoder
4.5. Brake resistor configuration

The models below the integrated controller have built-in braking unit, and the user only needs to
connect the braking resistor externally.
-51-
Accessories
With Braking Braking Braking

Voltage appropriate resistor resistor resistor Brake unit
Model
grade motor Minimum Maximum Power Selection
(kW) value (Ω) value (Ω) (W)
K-MC1000-2R2G-2 1.5 90 105 450
K-MC1000-3R7G-2 3.7 37 43 1100
K-MC1000-5R5G-2 5.5 25 29 1600
K-MC1000-7R5G-2 7.5 22 26 2500
200V class
K-MC1000-011G-2 11 10 14.5 3500
(3-phase)
K-MC1000-015G-2 15 8 13 4500
K-MC1000-018G-2 18 8 12.5 5500
K-MC1000-022G-2 22 7.5 5.2 6500
K-MC1000-030G-2 30 5.5 2.7 9000
K-MC1000-5R5G-4 5.5 43 100 1600
Built in
K-MC1000-7R5G-4 7.5 43 75 2500
K-MC1000-011G-4 11 43 50 3500
K-MC1000-015G-4 15 31 40 4500
K-MC1000-018G-4 18.5 31 32 5500
400V class
K-MC1000-022G-4 22 15 20 6500
(3-phase)
K-MC1000-030G-4 30 11 16 9000
K-MC1000-037G-4 37 13 16 11000
K-MC1000-045G-4 45 11 14 13500
K-MC1000-055G-4 55 11 12 16500
K-MC1000-075G-4 75 11 12 24000
4.6. Peripheral electrical component configuration

Main loop Control Ground
Accessories
Voltage Breaker Contactor

Model cable cable cable
grade (A) (A)
(mm2) (mm2) (mm2)
K-MC1000-2R2G-2 16 18 1.5 0.75 1.5
K-MC1000-3R7G-2 20 25 2.5 0.75 2.5
K-MC1000-5R5G-2 40 32 4 0.75 4
K-MC1000-7R5G-2 50 38 4 0.75 4
200V class
K-MC1000-011G-2 63 40 6 0.75 6
(3-phase)
K-MC1000-015G-2 80 50 6 0.75 6
K-MC1000-018G-2 100 65 10 0.75 10
K-MC1000-022G-2 160 95 35 0.75 16
K-MC1000-030G-2 225 170 70 0.75 35
K-MC1000-5R5G-4 25 25 2.5 0.75 1.5
400V class
K-MC1000-7R5G-4 32 25 4 0.75 2.5
(3-phase)
K-MC1000-011G-4 40 32 6 0.75 4
-52-
Accessories
Main loop Control Ground

Voltage Breaker Contactor
Model cable cable cable
grade (A) (A)
(mm2) (mm2) (mm2)
K-MC1000-015G-4 50 40 6 0.75 6
K-MC1000-018G-4 63 50 10 0.75 10
K-MC1000-022G-4 80 50 10 0.75 10
K-MC1000-030G-4 100 65 16 0.75 16
K-MC1000-037G-4 100 80 25 0.75 16
K-MC1000-045G-4 160 95 35 0.75 16
K-MC1000-055G-4 160 115 50 0.75 25
K-MC1000-075G-4 225 170 70 0.75 35
4.7. K-CT1000 installation, wiring and commissioning

Car top controller component description
J10, J11 J9 J8 J8 J7
Straight line connection Reserved (Pin1 ~ 4) (Pin6 ~ 9) Energy saving & arrival
signal interface interface CAN output CAN input bell control interface
J6
Programming
Car controller connection
interface
J5
Debug interface
JP27, JP28
interface
U4
SD card socket
S1
Function DIP
switch
Accessories
J1 J2 J3 J4
Communication gate Front door machine Rear door machine Car weighing switch
machine reserved interface control interface control interface monitoring interface
-53-
Accessories
Car top controller K-CT1000 installation size
W 185mm
H 105mm
W1 175mm
H1 95mm
Aperture 4mm
PCBA thickness 26.5mm
Car top controller terminal description

Default
Term Label Port Definition Function (Default)
Attribute
J1 A Door machine —— Function reservation
communication interface 1
B Door machine ——
Z Door machine ——
Y Door machine ——
J2 P1 Front door light curtain Normally Input method: open circuit input
signal open photoelectric isolation
P2 Front door safety touch Normally Input voltage : DC 24V
panel signal open Input current : 5mA
P3 Front door open limitsignal Normally
open
P4 Front door closed limitsignal Normally
Accessories
open
V- Signal common point ——
T1 Front door opening output Normally Output mode: relay output
signal open Contact type : normally open type
T2 Front door closing signal Normally Load voltage: 250V AC / 30 V DC
open Load current: resistive load 5 A
CM1 Signal common point ——
T3 Front door strong closing Normally
output open
J3 P5 Rear door light curtain Normally Input method: open circuit input
signal open photoelectric isolation
P6 Rear door safety touch panel Normally Input voltage : DC 24V
signal open Input current : 5mA
P7 Back door open door Normally
limitsignal open
P8 Rear door closing Normally
limitsignal open
-54-
Accessories
T4 Rear door opening output Normally Output mode: relay output

signal open Contact type : normally open type
T5 Rear door closing signal Normally Load voltage: 250V AC / 30 V DC
open Load current: resistive load 5 A
T6 Bypass sound and light Normally
alarm output open
J4 P9 Light load signal Normally Input method: open circuit input
open photoelectric isolation
P10 Half load signal Normally Input voltage : DC 24V
open Input current : 5mA
P11 Full load signal Normally
open
P12 Overload signal Normally
open
P13 Alternate signal Normally
open
J5 —— Operator interface —— ——
J6 —— Program download interface —— ——
J7 T7 To station ring output Normally Output mode: relay output
open Contact type : normally open type
CM5 Common point —— Load voltage: 250V AC / 30 V DC
Load current: resistive load 5 A
T8 Car lighting output Normally Output mode: relay output
closed Contact type : normally closed
CM6 Common point —— Load voltage: 250V AC / 30 V DC
T9 Car fan output Normally Load current: resistive load 3 A
closed
CM7 Common point ——
J8 24V+ DC 24V input —— Car top controller power input
24V- DC 24V input —— interface
DC 24V±5V
CANL CAN interface —— Car top controller CAN
Accessories
CANH CAN interface —— communication interface
FG Ground —— ——
V+ DC 24V+ output —— DC 24V power output interface
V- DC 24V-output ——
CANL CAN interface —— External CAN communication
CANH CAN interface ——
J9 P14 Alternate signal Normally ——
open
P15 Alternate signal Normally ——
open
INCT1 Alternate signal —— ——
INCT1 Alternate signal —— ——
J10 X11 Linear connection signal —— The connection between the car top
interface 11 junction box and the car operating
X10 Linear connection signal —— panel related parts:
interface 10 1. Emergency power &
X9 Straight line connection —— lighting
signal interface 9 2. Five-party intercom system
X8 Linear connection signal —— 3. Alarm bell system
-55-
Accessories
interface 8 4. Car inspection system

X7 Straight line connection ——
signal interface 7
J11 X6 Straight line connection ——
signal interface 6
signal interface 5
X4 Linear connection signal ——
interface 4
signal interface 3
signal interface 2
signal interface 1
J27 —— Car controller interface 1 —— Connect the car front door or rear
door controller
J28 —— Car controller interface 2 —— Connect the car front door or rear
door controller
U4 —— SD card interface —— Function reservation
JP2 —— Firmware upgrade shorting —— Special firmware upgrade
pin
S1 —— Combination dial switch —— Function selection
JP4 —— CAN communication —— The function is consistent with the
terminal resistance interface terminal definition description
JP5 —— 422 communication terminal —— The function is consistent with the
resistance interface terminal definition description
JP6 —— 422 communication terminal —— The function is consistent with the
resistance interface terminal definition description
Wire size and tightening torque

Please select the wire for wiring according to the table below. In addition, in order to improve the
simplicity and reliability of the wiring, it is recommended to use a tubular pre-insulated end on the
signal line .
Accessories
Terminal Tightening Connectable Recommended

terminal Thread wire
Bit torque wire size wire size
symbol specification Material
number N·m mm2 2 mm2
Flame
J1~J11 —— M3 0.43~0.61 0.75~1.5 0.75 retardant
cable
-56-
Accessories
4.8. K-CC1000 installation, wiring and commissioning

Car Controller Parts Description
P1 ~ P16
1 ~ 16 floor the call command interface
Debug interface
P17 to P30
Control box
switch
J3
JP4
Instruction
Car roof controller connection interface
expansion
interface
J2
SD card socket
JP37
J6
J5 (Pin1 ~ Pin8), J4 (Pin6 ~ Pin8) J4 (Pin1 ~ Pin5)
CAN communication
Straight line connection signal interface Control box repair signal
interface
Accessories
-57-
Accessories
Car controller K-CC1000 installation size
W 160mm
H 100mm
W1 150mm
H1 90mm
Aperture 4mm
PCBA thickness 16.5mm
Car controller terminal description

Default
Attribute
P1 —— Command signal on the 1st —— Four-wire button connection
floor K-CC1000
P2 —— Command signal on the 2nd —— P1~P16
floor Floor command L
P3 —— Command signal on the 3rd —— registration button
V+
P
floor V-
Wiring diagram
P4 —— Command signal on the 4th ——
floor Interface model：XH-4
floor
floor
floor
Accessories

floor
floor
floor
floor
floor
P13 —— Command signal in the 13th ——
floor
floor
floor
floor
-58-
Accessories
P17 —— Front door opening command Normally K-CC1000

signal open Open the door and
P18 —— Front door closing command Normally close the door button
L
Open the door to V+
signal open
keep the button P
P19 —— Open door hold signal —— Wiring diagram V-
P20 —— The driver is directed upwards Normally Interface model：XH-4

open
P21 —— The driver goes down Normally
open
P22 —— Commissioner service signal —— K-CC1000
P23 —— VIP service signal Normally
open V-
Control box switch P
P24 —— Direct drive signal ——
P25 —— Car lighting switch signal Normally
open Interface model：XH-2
P26 —— Car fan switch signal Normally

open
P27 —— Fireman service signal Normally
open
P28 —— Fireman closing signal Normally
open
P29 —— Alternate signal Normally
open
P30 —— IC Card enable Normally
open
J1 —— Program download terminal —— ——
J2 —— SD card interface —— ——
J3 —— Operator interface Normally ——
open
J5 X1 Straight line connection signal —— The connection between the car
interface 1 operating panel and the car top
X2 Straight line connection signal —— junction box:
interface 2 1. Emergency power &
X3 Straight line connection signal —— lighting
interface 3 2. Five-party intercom
Accessories
X4 Linear connection signal —— system
interface 4 3. Alarm bell system
X5 Straight line connection signal —— 4. Car inspection system
interface 5
X6 Straight line connection signal ——
interface 6
X7 Straight line connection signal ——
interface 7
interface 8
J4 X9 Straight line connection signal ——
interface 9
interface 10
interface 11
X12 Inspection signal common —— Car operating panel maintenance
point system
X12 Inspection signal common ——
-59-
Accessories
point
DW Inspection the downlink Normally
signal open
UP Inspection the uplink signal Normally
open
PE PE ——
J6 CANH CAN communication —— Internal call CAN communication
expansion interface & DC 24V expansion interface:
CANL CAN communication —— 1. Extended CAR
expansion interface OPERATING PANEL display
24V- DC 24V output —— device
24V+ DC 24V output —— 2. Extended CAR
CANH CAN communication —— OPERATING PANEL voice
expansion interface playback device
CANL CAN communication —— 3. Extended smart IC card
expansion interface building controller
24V- DC 24V output ——
24V+ DC 24V output ——
S1 —— Combination dial switch —— Function selection
JP1 —— Firmware upgrade shorting —— Special firmware upgrade
pin
JP2 —— CAN communication terminal —— The function is consistent with the
resistance terminal definition description
JP4 —— Instruction expansion board —— The function is consistent with the
interface terminal definition description
JP37 —— Car top controller connector —— Connection car top controller
Wire size and tightening torque

Please select the wire for wiring according to the table below. In addition, in order to improve the
simplicity and reliability of the wiring, it is recommended to use a tubular pre-insulated end on the
signal line.
Terminal Tightening Connectable Recommended
Terminal Thread Wire
Bit torque wire size wire size
symbol specification Material
number N·m mm2 mm2
Accessories
J4 Flame
J5 —— M3 0.43~0.61 0.75~1.5 0.75 retardant
J6 cable
-60-
Accessories
4.9. K-CI1000 installation, wiring and commissioning

Car instruction expansion board parts description
Instruction to expand
the input interface
Extended instruction interface

Instruction to extend
the output interface
Car command controller K-CI1000 installation size
W 100mm
H 60mm
W1 90mm
H1 50mm
Aperture 4mm
PCBA thickness 12mm
Accessories
Car command expansion board terminal description
Default
Attribute
P1 —— Expand the command —— Four-wire button connection
signal in n+1 floor K-CI1000

P2 —— Expand the n+2 floor —— P1~P8
In-floor instruction L
command signal registration button
V+
P
P3 —— Expand the n+3 floor —— Wiring diagram V-
command signal Interface model：XH-4

P4 —— Expand the n+4 floor ——
command signal
command signal
command signal
command signal
-61-
Accessories

command signal
J1 —— Extended input interface —— Connect car controller command
extension interface
J2 —— Extended output interface —— Connect the next level car command
expansion board input interface
4.10. K-06T installation, wiring and commissioning

K-06T function description
No. Function name Features

Elevator current status The current system operation and special status are
1.
display displayed according to the control system information.
Custom background The display background can be changed according to user
2.
display needs.
The time zone standard time can be displayed in the
3. Local time display
specified display area as required.
Time loop or play pictures such as advertisements,
4. Advertising play promotions, floor functions, etc. according to the floor
address.
Real-time temperature The current ambient temperature value can be displayed in
5.
display the specified display area as required.
Custom LOGO can be displayed in the specified display area
6. LOGO display
according to requirements
7. Lock car It is equipped with a lock car signal input control point.
8. Fire Equipped with fire signal input control points.
Arrival bell and direction Equipped with 4 output points to supterminal the station bell
9.
forecast and direction prediction output.
It has the functions of up and down calls and button
10. Outgoing call function
indications outside the hall .
K-06T display characters

Accessories
-62-
Accessories
K-06T elevator status display
UP Down INSPECTION MALFUNCTION Overload Fire
Full load ATTENDANT Earthquake VIP UPS Lock car
K-06T installation
 Precautions
Note
 Please install it in a place free from oil mist, dust and clean.
 Do not allow metal powder, oil, water, etc. to enter the display controller.
 Do not install in a place where there is flammable material such as wood.
 Please install it in a place free of liquids and harmful gases.
 Please install it in a place with low vibration.
 Please install it in a place with a small amount of salt.
 Prevent foreign objects from falling on the surface of the display controller during work.
Accessories
Indication
 Remove the protective film from the LCD surface before installation.
 Please install according to the size of the controller, the distance between the mounting holes
and the diameter of the mounting holes.
 Make sure that the LCD screen is intact when installing.
 Make sure that the electronics do not touch anything else.
-63-
Accessories
 Installation direction
Horizontal installation
To install vertical
Vertical installation Horizontal installation
direction direction
Vertical Horizontal
Vertical installation direction

n
io
t
a
ll
Arrow pointing n ta
s
o
ti n
il
Vertical installation la
l a
ta cit
direction s r
n
li l n o
i
e
Arrow pointing
Vertical a
t
a
ci tc V
n rt e Horizontal
l
o
iz e ird
ta r V
Vertical
n n o
o o H installation direction
ir itc
z
o e
H idr Horizontal
K-06T Installation size
W 168mm
H 135mm
W1 160mm
H1 127mm
Aperture 3.5mm
PCBA
25mm
thickness
Accessories
K-06T Part description
K-06T Icon
-64-
Accessories

V- Uplink input common
K-06T
UP Upstream input
CN1 Up and down the hall
V+ Output positive V-
Call button wiring
L0 Output negative diagram
UP/DN
V+
V- Downstream input common L0
DN Downstream input
CN2 Interface model：XH-4
V+ Output positive
L1 Output negative
V- Lock car input common
K-06T
LK Lock car input
CN3
V+ Output positive
Lock ladder & fire V-
L2 Output negative Switch wiring diagram LK/FR
V+
V- Fire input public L0
FR Fire input
CN4
V+ Output positive Interface model：XH-4
L3 Output negative
V+ Output positive Indication
T3 Function reservation When the load current is less than
T2 Upstream forecast output 400mA, the control interface power
T1 Downstream forecast output supply can be directly used. If the
CN6
T0 To station ring output load is greater than 400mA, please
Output negative configure the conversion board for
V- driving (conversion board type:
K-07K)
Host computer adjustments The function is consistent with the terminal
CN7 ——
terminal definition description
Program flash terminal The function is consistent with the terminal
CN9 ——
definition description
Function reservation The function is consistent with the terminal
CN10 ——
Programming interface The function is consistent with the terminal
CN11 ——
Accessories
CANH CAN interface
CANL CAN interface Interface model: XH-5
CN13
—— Empty foot
GND DC 24V-input Power supply characteristics: DC24V ± 15%
24V DC 24V+ input
CN14 —— SD card socket Update picture
Function selection dial switch Mode 1 2 3 4 Power
Set On Off On
Off
Run Off
- On
S2 —— Off
ISP On
- On
Demo Off Off On On
Termination
On On
Resistor
D1 —— Call indicator light Light up when registering the upstream call
D4 —— Call indicator light Lighting downlink call registration
D7 —— spare spare
-65-
Accessories

D14 —— Output indicator Lights up when T0 is output
Serial terminal send signal indicator
D24 —— Signal indicator
Normal operation flashes after power-on
Serial terminal receiving signal indicator
D25 —— Signal indicator
Normal operation flashes after power-on
CAN signal receiving indicator
D26 —— Signal indicator Blinks when communication is normal after
power-on
CAN signal transmission indicator
D27 —— Signal indicator After power-on, the communication is
normal when the hall caller sends a signal.
5V power indicator
D32 —— Power Indicator
Normally lit after power-on
3.3V power indicator
D33 —— Power Indicator
Normally lit after power-on
K-06T Wiring
 Wiring instructions
No. Interface Wiring instructions Remarks

1. Power and XH-5 terminal + twisted pair shielded Standard
communication extension cable configuration
interface
2. Up call button interface XH-4 terminal + 4 core 0.3mm 2 extension Standard
cable configuration
3. Down call button XH-4 terminal + 4 core 0.3mm 2 extension Standard
interface cable configuration
4. Direction prediction and XH-6 terminal + 6 core 0.3mm 2 extension Select
arrival ring interface cable configuration
Accessories
5. Lock car interface XH-4 terminal + 2 core 0.3mm 2 extension Select

cable configuration
6. Fire interface XH-4 terminal + 2 core 0.3mm 2 extension Select
cable configuration
 Precautions
Note
 Wiring must be carried out in accordance with the instructions in this manual, otherwise it will
not work properly!
 Be sure to configure the twisted pair shielded cable for the power supply and communication
interface. Otherwise, the display controller will not work properly!
 The power supply and communication connection cable should be as thick as possible, otherwise
the display controller will not work properly due to the voltage drop of the cable itself!
 The grounding terminal must be standardized and reliable, otherwise the controller may be
damaged and the system may not work properly!
-66-
Accessories
Indication
 Make sure that all terminals connected to the controller are secure and reliable in the wiring,
otherwise the controller will not work properly or be damaged!
 During the wiring process, something should be prevented from falling into the controller
junction box, otherwise the controller will be damaged!
 Do not share the grounding wire with power equipment.
 Be sure to ground the power and communication shields and connect directly to the PE terminal
of the control cabinet.
 The outer call box and the metal panel of the control compartment must be grounded to prevent
static electricity from damaging the device or causing interference when the weather is dry.
 Use the specifications specified in the electrical equipment technical standard for the grounding
wire to shorten the wiring as much as possible.
 K-06T wiring instructions
a) Power and
K-03T & K-06T
communication wiring
instructions 24V
GND
CANL
CANH
Twisted pair shielded cable Cable shield
Power and communication wiring
b) Call control and fire &

lock car wiring
instructions
K-03T & K-06T K-03T & K-06T K-03T & K-06T
V- UP V+ L0 V- DN V+ L0 V- UP V+ L0 V- DN V+ L0 V- LK V+ L0 V- FR V+ L0
Accessories
Four-wire button wiring Three-wire button wiring Fire & lock ladder wiring
c) Parallel shared button

wiring instructions
L0 L0
K-03T & K-06T
K-03T & K-06T
V+ V+
DN DN
V- V-
L0 L0
V+ V+
UP UP
V- V-
Common button wiring
-67-
Accessories
d) Direction Forecast &

Station Bell Output
K-03T & K-06T

V-
Wiring Instructions T0
Configuration T1
instructions when the T2
load current is less than T3
400mA: V+
Outside the hall to the station bell & direction forecast wiring 1
Configuration
instructions when the V-
K-03T & K-06T
load current is greater V- External power supply

V- V+
than 400mA: T0
K-07K
T0 V-
T1
T1 T0
T2
T2 T1
T3
V+ T2
V+
V+
Outside the hall to the station bell & direction forecast wiring 2
K-06T Adjustments
 Human machine interface definition
No. Interface Description
DIP switch Enter the parameter setting interface:

Pin1=ON, Pin 2=OFF, Pin 3=OFF, Pin 4=OFF;
1.
Exit the parameter setting interface:
Pin 1=OFF, Pin 2=OFF, Pin 3=OFF, Pin 4=OFF;
Menu selection interface:
Select the menu up;
2. Up call button Parameter setting interface:
Increase the parameter setting value (jog increase or long press
Accessories
acceleration to increase the set value)

Select the menu down;
3. Down call button Parameter setting interface:
Decrease the parameter setting value (jog reduction or long press
acceleration to decrease the setting value)
Confirm to enter the menu setting operation;
4. Lock car button
Confirm the parameter settings and exit the menu.
Confirm to enter the menu setting operation;
5. Fire button
Confirm the parameter settings and exit the menu.
-68-
Accessories
 User interface display instructions

Chinese / English menu display setting instructions:
Menu display Parameter settings and related instructions
A. Switch the lock car or fire button to switch
K-06T CONFIG between Chinese and English menu
display;
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese） B. After the setting is completed, it must be
<1>K:FLOOR NUMBER SETTING saved and powered off, otherwise it will
<2>F:FUNCTION SELECT
<3>G:GROUP NUMBER SETTING be invalid.
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER C. This article uses the English interface as
<5>E:SPECIFIC FUNCTION an example to introduce parameter
<6>B:CANBUS BAUDRATE SETTING settings.
<7>T:CHIME TIME SETTING
<8>DISPLAY DIRECTION SETTING
D. This manual uses the K-06T interface as
<9>UPDATE FLASH an example. The K-03T menu setting
<10>ADVERTISING MODE operation is consistent with K-06T .
<11>DATE&TIME SETTING
<12>FACTORY RESET
<13>SAVE&QUIT
MENU DIRECTIONS
[Down:3-4][Up:3-4]:Select Item
[F i r e:3-4][Lock:3-4]:Enter/Quit
Fire Lock Down Up
[3-4] [3-4] [3-4] [3-4]
Floor address setting instructions:

A. Jog the up button or down button to
K-06T CONFIG switch to the floor setup menu;
ENGLISH(英文) / 中文简体（Chinese）
B. Jog the lock car or fire button to
Accessories
enter& confirm the parameter settings;
<1>K:FLOOR NUMBER SETTING C. After the setting is completed, it must
<2>F:FUNCTION SELECT be saved and powered off, otherwise it will
<3>G:GROUP NUMBER SETTING be invalid.
D. Parameter Description:
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER
FLOOR NUMBER When the floor address is 0 , the display
<5>E:SPECIFIC FUNCTION controller is a car display function;
0
<6>B:CANBUS BAUDRATE SETTING When the floor address = !0 , the
displaycontroller is an external display
function.The default value is 0 .
Fire Lock Down Up
-69-
Accessories
Function setting description:

A. Jog the up button or the down button to
K-06T CONFIG
switch to the function selection menu;
B. Jog lock car or fire entry
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese） C. Jog up or down need to set the function
<1>K:FLOOR NUMBER SETTING D. Jog lock car setting enable or normally
open / normally closed
<1>LIFT LOCK [DISABLE] E. After setting, press Fire to exit this
<3>G:GROUP NUMBER SETTING menu ,you must save it or the setting will be
<2>FIRE SERVICE [DISABLE]
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER invalid.
<3>BUZZLE ENABLE [DISABLE] F. Parameter Description:
<5>E:SPECIFIC FUNCTION
<4>INSPECTION ENERGY SAVE ENABLE= function enabled;
<6>B:CANBUS BAUDRATE SETTING DISABLE= Function is off;
[DISABLE]
<7>T:CHIME TIME SETTING NORMAL OPEN= Signal point is
<5>FIRE [NORMAL OPEN]
<8>DISPLAY DIRECTION SETTING normally open;
NORMAL CLOSE= Signal point
normally closed;
Default: All features are off and the input
point is always on.
Fire Lock Down Up
Group number setting description:

A. Jog the up button or down button to
K-06T CONFIG switch to the floor setup menu;
B. Jog the lock car or fire button to enter&
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese） confirm the parameter settings;
<1>K:FLOOR NUMBER SETTING C. After the setting is completed, it must
Accessories
be saved and powered off, otherwise it will

be invalid.
<3>G:GROUP NUMBER SETTING D. Parameter Description:
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER When the group number is 0 , the display
GROUP NUMBER
controller is in the Simplex operation;
0 When the group number is 1-8 , the display
<6>B:CANBUS BAUDRATE SETTING controller is the group number of the group
<7>T:CHIME TIME SETTING control status.
<8>DISPLAY DIRECTION SETTING The default value is 0 .
Fire Lock Down Up
-70-
Accessories
Software version view:

K-06T CONFIG
A． Jog the up button or down button to switch
to the version display menu.
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese） B． Click on the lock car or fire button to
enter;
<1>K:FLOOR NUMBER SETTING
C． Only the current software version number
<2>F:FUNCTION SELECT is displayed and cannot be set.
<3>G:GROUP NUMBER SETTING
K-06T VER 1.0 NUMBER
<4>V:VERSION
<1>P：Software Version:1.0
<6>B:CANBUS BAUDRATE SETTING
Fire Lock Down Up
Special function setting instructions:

A. Click the up button or the down button to switch
K-06T CONFIG to the special function setting menu;
B. Click the lock car or fire button to enter the
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese） menu;
C. Click the up or down button to switch the
<1>K:FLOOR NUMBER SETTING function to be set;
<2>F:FUNCTION SELECT D. Click the lock car button to enable or disable it.
Accessories
E. Must be saved after the setting is completed,
otherwise it is invalid;
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER
<1>DIRECTION INDICATION F. Parameter Description:
<1> DIRECTION INDICATION
<5>E:SPECIFIC FUNCTION Alternate menu Default : DISABLE
[DISABLE]
<6>B:CANBUS BAUDRATE SETTING <2> HANDICAP FUNCTION
<2>HANDICAP FUNCTION [DISABLE] Alternate menu Default : DISABLE
<7>T:CHIME TIME SETTING <3> RESERVE
<3>RESERVE [DISABLE]
Back door display enable Default : DISABLE
<8>DISPLAY DIRECTION SETTING menu
<4>RESERVE [DISABLE]
<4> RESERVE
<9>UPDATE FLASH
<5>RESERVE [DISABLE] Alternate menu Default : DISABLE
<5> RESERVE
Alternate menu Default : DISABLE
<6> RESERVE
[Down:3-4][Up:3-4]:Select Item <7> RESERVE
<8> RESERVE
Fire Lock Down Up Alternate menu Default : DISABLE
Parameter value description :
ENABLE= function enabled; DISABLE=Function is
off;
-71-
Accessories
CAN bus communication baud rate setting description:

A. Click the up button or the down button to
K-06T CONFIG
switch to the baud rate setting menu;
B. Click the lock car or fire button to enter
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese） the menu;
<1>K:FLOOR NUMBER SETTING C. Click the uplink or downlink to select the
baud rate;
D. Must be saved after the setting is
<3>G:GROUP NUMBER SETTING completed, otherwise it is invalid;
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER E. Parameter Description:
00= low baud rate;
CANBUS BAUDRATE
01= High baud rate;
<6>B:CANBUS BAUDRATE SETTING The default value is 00 .
Fire Lock Down Up
Instructions for setting the station ring time:

A. Click the up or down button to switch
K-06T CONFIG to the station ring time setting menu;
B. Click the fire or lock car button toenter
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese） the menu;
C. Click the up or down button to switch
Accessories

the output time and output interval setting
menu;
<3>G:GROUP NUMBER SETTING D. Click the lock car to enter
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER theparameter setting operation, and click the
down or up button to adjust the parameters;
‘T’ ARRIVAI CHIME TIME E. After setting, press the fire button to
<6>B:CANBUS BAUDRATE SETTING exit the menu.
<1>CHIME TIME [3000ms]
<7>T:CHIME TIME SETTING Must be saved, otherwise invalid.
<8>DISPLAY DIRECTION SETTING F. Parameter Description:
The setting unit is 100ms and themaximum
value is 10000ms.
Default: output time = 3000ms,
Interval = 3000ms .
Fire Lock Down Up
-72-
Accessories
Display direction setting instructions:

A. Press the up or down button to switch to
K-06T CONFIG
the display direction setting menu;
B. Click the fire or lock car button to enter the
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese） setting operation, press the up or down
<1>K:FLOOR NUMBER SETTING button to select horizontal or vertical
display;
C. Must be saved after setting, otherwise it
<3>G:GROUP NUMBER SETTING will be invalid.
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER D. The default is direct.
DISP LA Y MO DE [VE RT IC AL]
Fire Lock Down Up
Update caption:
A. Insert the SD card and press the up or
K-06T CONFIG down button to select the picture update
menu.
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese）
B. Click on the lock car or fire button to start
<1>K:FLOOR NUMBER SETTING updating the picture;
<2>F:FUNCTION SELECT C. Wait for the image to be automatically
Accessories
updated.
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER
[F i r e:3 4][Lock:3 4]:Enter/Quit
Fire Lock Down Up

[3-4] [3-4] [3-4] [3-4]
-73-
Accessories
Ad play mode setting instructions:

A. Press the up or down button to
K-06T CONFIG switch to the ad play mode setting menu;
B. Click the fire or lock car button to
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese） enter the setting operation, press the up
or down button to select the specific
parameters.
<2>F:FUNCTION SELECT C. Must be saved after setting,
<3>G:GROUP NUMBER SETTING otherwise it will be invalid.
D. Parameter Description:
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER
0= Ads are always switching to a single
ADVERTISING MODE 5
<5>E:SPECIFIC FUNCTION image.
<6>B:CANBUS BAUDRATE SETTING 1= Advertising image is switched by
floor flip.
<7>T:CHIME TIME SETTING 2 = handover destination floor
<8>DISPLAY DIRECTION SETTING byadvertising images,
differentadvertising images
corresponding to different floors.
3-5000=The ad is cycled by the
corresponding time, in seconds.
The default value is 5 .
Fire Lock Down Up

[3-4] [3-4] [3-4] [3-4]
Date setting instructions:

A. Press the up or down button to
K-06T CONFIG select the date setting menu;
B. Press the lock car or fire button to
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese） enter the menu setting interface;
C. Press the up or down button to
Accessories

DATE & TIME SETTING select the item to be set, press the lock
YEAR [2014] car to enter the parameter setting
<3>G:GROUP NUMBER SETTING operation, and press the up or down
MONTH [01]
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER button to adjust the parameter.
DATE [08] D. After the setting is completed, press
DAY [03] the fire button to exit, it must be saved,
<6>B:CANBUS BAUDRATE SETTING otherwise it will be invalid.
<7>T:CHIME TIME SETTING E. Parameter Description:
<8>DISPLAY DIRECTION SETTING This parameter will not be restored to
the factory value.
This parameter has no default value.
Fire Lock Down Up

[3-4] [3-4] [3-4] [3-4]
-74-
Accessories
Restore default settings settings:

A. Press the up or down button to select
K-06T CONFIG
the restore default menu;
B. Press the lock car or fire button to
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese） restore the factory default value.
<1>K:FLOOR NUMBER SETTING C. Must be saved after the setting is
completed, otherwise it is invalid.
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER
Factory Reset
Fire Lock Down Up

[3-4] [3-4] [3-4] [3-4]
Save & Exit Description:

K-06T CONFIG
A． After the parameters are set, press the
up or down button to select the save
menu.
ENGLISH(英文)/中文简体（Chinese）
B． The parameters can be saved by
Accessories
pressing the lock car or the fire button.
<4>V:VERSION NUMBER
Save Successful!
Fire Lock Down Up

[3-4] [3-4] [3-4] [3-4]
-75-
Accessories
4.11. K-03T installation, wiring and commissioning

K-03T Function description

Elevator current status The current system operation and special status are displayed
1.
display according to the control system information.
Custom background The display background can be changed according to user
2.
display needs.
Customized LOGO can be displayed in any of the display
3. LOGO display
areas as required
Arrival bell and direction Equipped with 4 output points to supterminal the station bell
6.
forecast and direction prediction output.
indicationsoutside the hall .
K-03T Display characters
K-03T Elevator status display

Accessories
UP Down INSPECTION MALFUNCTION Overload Fire
Full load ATTENDANT Earthquake VIP UPS Lock car
-76-
Accessories
K-03T Installation
 Precautions
Note
 Please install it in a place free from oil mist, dust and clean.
 Do not allow metal powder, oil, water, etc. to enter the display controller.
 Do not install in a place where there is flammable material such as wood.
 Please install it in a place free of liquids and harmful gases.
 Please install it in a place with low vibration.
 Please install it in a place with a small amount of salt.
 Prevent foreign objects from falling on the surface of the display controller during work.
Indication
 Remove the protective film from the LCD surface before installation.
 Please install according to the size of the controller, the distance between the mounting holes
and the diameter of the mounting holes.
 Make sure that the LCD screen is intact when installing.
 Make sure that the electronics do not touch anything else.
Vertical installation Horizontal installation
Arrow pointing
Horizontal
installation direction
Arrow pointing Horizontal
Vertical installation
direction
Vertical
Accessories
-77-
Accessories
K-03T Nstallation size
W 160mm
H 84mm
W1 150mm
H1 74mm
Aperture 3.5mm
PCBA thickness 12mm
K-03T Parts Description
K-03T Icon

Accessories
CN1 —— Function reservation The function is consistent with the terminal

CN2 CANH CAN interface Indication
CANL CAN interface Interface model: XH-5
—— Empty foot Power supply characteristics:
GND DC 24V-input DC24V ± 15%
24V DC 24V+ input
CN3 V+ Output positive Indication
T3 Function reservation When the load current is less than
T2 Upstream forecast output 400mA, the control interface power
T1 Downstream forecast output supply can be directly used. If the
T0 To station ring output load is greater than 400mA, please
V- Output negative configure the conversion board for
driving (conversion board type:
K-07K)
CN4 —— SWD terminal ——
CN6 —— Programming interface The function is consistent with the terminal
CN7 —— Function reservation ——
-78-
Accessories

CN8 —— Host computer adjustments The function is consistent with the terminal
terminal definition description
CN10 —— SD card socket Update picture
CN11 L3 Output negative
K-03T
V+ Output positive
Up and down the hall
FR Fire input V-
Call button wiring
V- Fire input public diagram
UP/DN
V+
CN12 L2 Output negative L0
V+ Output positive
LK Lock car input Interface model:XH-4
V- Lock car inputcommon

CN13 L1 Output negative K-03T
V+ Output positive
Lock ladder & fire V-
DN Downstream input Switch wiring diagram LK/FR
V+
V- Downstream input common L0
CN14 L0 Output negative

Interface model:XH-4
V+ Output positive
UP Upstream input
V- Uplink input common
RST —— reset button ——
S2 —— Function selection dial Mode 1 2 3 4 Power
switch Set On Off On
Run Off Off - On
ISP On Off - On
Demo Off Off On On
Termination
On On
Resistor
D5 —— Power Indicator 5V power indicator light, the normal
operation is always on after power-on.
D6 —— Power Indicator 3.3V power indicator light, the normal
operation is always on after power-on.
D7 —— Signal indicator The serial terminal receives the signal
indicator, and the normal status flashes after
Accessories
power-on.
D8 —— Signal indicator The serial terminal sends a signal indicator,
and the normal status flashes after
power-on.
D9 —— Signal indicator CAN signal receiving indicator, flashing
when communication is normal after
power-on
D10 —— Signal indicator CA N signal transmission indicator. After
power-on, the communication is normal
when the hall caller sends a signal.
D29 —— Down call indicator Lighting downlink call registration
D30 —— Up call indicator Light up when registering the upstream call
-79-
Accessories
K-03T Wiring instructions


1. Power and communication XH-5 terminal + twisted pair Standard
interface shielded extension cable configuration
2. Up call button interface XH-4 terminal + 4 core Standard
0.3mm2extension cable configuration
3. Down call buttoninterface XH-4 terminal + 4 core Standard
4. Direction prediction and arrival XH-6 terminal + 6 core Select
ring interface 0.3mm2extension cable configuration
5. Lock car interface XH-4 terminal + 2 core Select
6. Fire interface XH-4 terminal + 2 core Select
 Precautions
Note
 Wiring must be carried out in accordance with the instructions in this manual, otherwise it
will not work properly!
 Be sure to configure the twisted pair shielded cable for the power supply and communication
 The power supply and communication connection cable should be as thick as possible,
otherwise the display controller will not work properly due to the voltage drop of the cable
itself!
 The grounding terminal must be standardized and reliable, otherwise the controller may be
Indication
 Make sure that all terminals connected to the controller must be secure and reliable in the
wiring, otherwise the controller will not work properly or be damaged!
Accessories
 During the wiring process, something should be prevented from falling into the controller
 Be sure to ground the power and communication shields and connect directly to the PE
terminal of the control cabinet.
 The outer call box and the metal panel of the control compartment must be grounded to
prevent static electricity from damaging the device or causing interference when the weather
is dry.
 Use the specifications specified in the electrical equipment technical standard for the
grounding wire to shorten the wiring as much as possible.
K-03T Wiring
Please refer to K-06T wiring
K-03T Adjustments
Please refer to K-06T adjustments
-80-
Accessories
4.12. K-PI1100 Installation, Wiring and Commissioning

K-PI1100 Function description

Display the main controller to set the display floor or special
characters.
High-density dot matrix
1. Display the current running and special status of the
character display
elevator.
The display content scrolls.
Arrival bell and Equipped with 4 output points to supterminal the station bell
4.
directionforecast and direction prCediction output.
Support scrolling display in simplified Chinese, traditional
6. Display in multiple languages
Chinese, English and other languages
K-PI1100 Display characters
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
Accessories
U V W X Y Z
-81-
Accessories
K-PI1100 Elevator status display
INSPECTI EARTHQU OVERLOA

UP DN IC UPS
ON AKE D
MALFUNCTI ATTENDAN
FIRE LOCK CAR VIP FULL LOAD
ON T
K-PI1100 Installation
 Precautions
Note
Indication
 Please install according to the size of the controller, the distance between the mounting holes and
the diameter of the mounting holes.
 Be sure to ensure that the LEDs are intact during installation.
Accessories
n The installation direction is shown in the arrow
o
it
a
ll Vertical installation direction
l
a
ts a
t
n
in o
z
ir
o
H
-82-
Accessories
 Installation dimensions
Installation Space
K-PI1100 Parts description
K-PI1100 Icon
CAN-R
P5 P2
P4
P1
P6
P3
LE1 LE2 BOOT

BELL1 JP2 SW1
Terminal Illustrate Definition Function
Accessories
P1 Power and 24+: Positive pole of 24V power
communication supply
interface 24-: Negative pole of 24V power
supply
CL: negative pole of CAN
communication interface
CH: Positive pole of CAN
JP2 Program flash TXD
port RXD
0V
+3.3V
P3 Up call interface L1: output negative pole (button light UP: rated output current
DC24V-) 50mA
V+: output positive pole (button light
DC24V+) Parameter setting status:
UP: Up input (button) parameter value increase
V-: Upstream input common terminal
-83-
Accessories

(button common terminal)
P2 Down call L2: output negative pole (button light DN: rated output current
interface DC24V-) 50mA
V+: output positive pole (button light Parameter setting status:
DC24V+) parameter value decreases
DN: Downstream input (button)
V-: Downstream input common
terminal (button common terminal)
P4 Elevator lock LK: elevator lock input Parameter setting status:
interface V-: Elevator lock input common page on the menu
terminal
P5 Fire interface FR: Fire input Parameter setting status:
V-: Fire input common terminal page down the menu
P6 Output port V-: Output DC24V- 4 transistor outputs
T0: Arrival bell output T0: rated output current
T1: Downcast forecast output 50mA;
T2: Uplink forecast output T1: rated output current
T3: Multi-function output 50mA;
V+: output DC24V+ T2: rated output current
50mA;
T3: rated output current
50mA;
BOOT Program flash Short circuit is required when the 2pin
short interface program is flashed
SW1 Parameter Menu entry and exit Press 2 times to enter the
setting button menu, press and hold for 3
seconds to exit the menu
BELL1 Buzzer Outgoing beep or as arrival bell
LE1 Power Indicator Always on when the power supply is
normal
LE2 CAN Flashes when CAN communication is
Communication normal
light
CAN-R CAN CAN communication terminating 2pin
Accessories
Communication resistor
terminating
resistor
K-PI1100 Wiring

1. Power and VH-4 terminal + 4 core twisted pair shielded The standard
communication extension cable configuration
interface
2. Up call button interface XH-4 terminal + 4 core 0.3mm2 cable Select
configuration
3. Down call button Select
4. Ladder lock interface & XH-2 terminal + 4 core 0.3mm2 cable Select
fire interface configuration
-84-
Accessories
5. Direction forecast and XH-6 terminal + 4 core 0.3mm2 cable Select

arrival bell interface configuration
 Precautions
Note
 Wiring must be carried out in accordance with the instructions in this manual, otherwise it will
not work properly!
 The power supply and communication connection cable should be as thick as possible, otherwise
Indication
 Be sure to ground the power and communication shields and connect directly to the PE terminal
 The outer call box and the metal panel of the control compartment must be grounded to prevent
 Use the specifications specified in the electrical equipment technical standard for the grounding
Accessories
a) Power and communication wiring instructions
K-PI1100
24V
GND
CANL
CANH Twisted pair
shielded cable Cable shield
b) Call control wiring instructions
-85-
Accessories
Three-wire button Four-wire button Common button wiring

wiring method wiring method
L2 L2
V+ V+
DN DN
K-PI1100
K-PI1100
K-PI1100 K-PI1100 V- V-
L1 L1
V- UP V+ L1 V- DN V+ L2 V+ V+
V- UP V+ L1 V- DN V+ L2
UP UP
V- V-
c) Ladder lock & fire wiring instructions
Fire & Elevator Lock

Wiring
K-PI1100
LK V- V- FR
d) Direction Forecast & Arrival Bell Output Wiring Instructions
Configuration instructions when the load Configuration instructions when the load current is greater
current is less than 400mA： than 400mA：
Outside the hall arrival bell & Outside the hall arrival bell & direction forecast
direction forecast wiring method 1 wiring method 2
V-
External
V- V- power
V- V+
supply
K-PI1100
K-PI1100
T0
T0
K-07K
T0 V-
T1
T1 T1 T0
T2
T2 T2 T1
T3
V+ T2
T3
V+
V+
V+
Accessories
e) Instructions on the outbound call line shared by the disabled
-86-
Accessories
Fire & Ladder Lock for Disabled Outbound Call Connection
ll
a e
c k
d a
n m
u K-PI1100 st
d o le h
e
l b
t lsl p g
i ll
b u a o n L a
a o c e w c
ts t
is k d p t o
d h p
u
d n n d h a g
e li u e g
il d c il d
h n o l
b e re ts t
h e
t
T2
o
V+
p p
T3
T1
T0
LK V- V- FR
n
V-
r w b
t a F a g
o K is R o p il p
o
f D L u
o D F tt a
c d
r
c
e a
c
u i a r n i
& & b
ll
d
n w
o
f to
t
d
n
T T a p n u a
3 0 a
c H U D
w b H
o
K-PI1100 Adjustments

Enter the parameter setting interface:
Double click the SW1 button
1. SW1 Button Save & exit the parameter setting interface:
Long press for 3S or 10S without action, the display flashes 3 times and
automatically saves and exits
Parameter setting interface:
2. Up call button Increase the parameter setting value (increase the setting value by
jogging)
Accessories
3. Down call button
Decrease parameter set value (jog to decrease set value)
4. Fire button
Jog up to select the menu;
5. Ladder lock button
Scroll down to select the menu;

The left picture K represents the floor address menu, and 0 represents the floor
address.
a) Press the elevator lock or fire button to switch to the floor setting
menu;
b) Jog or long press the up button or down button to set the floor;
c) After the setting is completed, press and hold the SW1 button, and "S
OK" is displayed, indicating that the setting is successful;
d) Description of parameter K: default 0, range 0~128.
-87-
Accessories

K=0, the display controller is the car display function;
K≠0, the display controller functions as a display outside the hall.
Button adhesion detection time description:
Figure C on the left represents the button sticking detection time setting menu,
and 10 represents the time.
a) Press the elevator lock or fire button to switch to the button adhesion
detection time menu;
b) Jog or long press the up or down button to select and set parameters;
OK" is displayed, indicating that the setting is successful;;
d) Parameter description: default 10, unit: second, range 0~99.
C=0, which means that the button sticking is not detected;
C≠0 means the detection button is stuck, and the detection time is
judged according to the set value.
Status display character scrolling speed description:
The left picture H represents the status display character scroll speed setting
menu, 1 represents fast.
H=1, it means that the status display characters scroll fast;
H=2, it means that the status display characters scroll slowly.
Display directions:
D on the left represents the display orientation setting menu, and 0 represents
horizontal display.
Accessories

D=0, which means horizontal display;
D=1, which means vertical display.
Status display character language description:
The left picture L represents the status display character language setting menu,
and 0 represents English.
L=0 English;
L=1 Simplified Chinese;
L=2 Traditional Chinese.
Special function description:
-88-
Accessories

E in the left figure represents the special function menu, and 5 represents the
multi-function selection.
a) Press the elevator lock or fire button to switch to the special function
menu;
d) Parameter description: default 5, range 0~64.
The related function settings are shown in the table below.
Parameter Function Illustrate Defaults
=0, Off
bit0 (1) Outgoing call arrival floor flashes 1
=1, On
=0, Off
bit1 (2) Turn off the buzzer function 0
=1, On
Internal display sliding display =0, Off
bit2 (4) 1
function =1, On
=0, Off
bit3 (8) Demo mode 0
=1, On
=0, Off
bit4 (16) Doorbell function 1
=1, On
Disabled sharing outbound call =0, Off
bit5 (32) 1
function =1, On
Instructions for front and rear doors and disabled persons:
Figure B on the left shows the setting parameters for outbound calls from the
front and rear doors, and 0 means that a normal person makes outbound calls
from the front door.
a) Press the elevator lock or fire button to switch to the front and rear
door menu;
B=0, General outbound call from the front door;
Accessories
B=1, General outbound call from the back door;
B=2, The disabled person calls out from the front door;
B=3, The disabled person calls out from the back door.
Description of group control group number:
G in the left figure represents the group control group number setting
parameter, and 0 represents no group number.
door menu;
G=0, No group No.;
G≠0, The elevator corresponding to the group No. is displayed and
registered.
-89-
Accessories


Display the main controller to set the display floor or special
characters.
1. LED display Display the current running and special status of the
elevator.
The display content scrolls.
4.
Simple and convenient to set
6. Automatic parameter saving function.
parameters
Ultra-thin dot matrix display
7. Ultra-thin installation design, PCBA thickness is 7.5mm.
control
K-PI1200 Display characters
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A B C D E F G H I J
Accessories
K L M N O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z
-90-
Accessories
K-PI1200 Elevator status display
EARTHQUA
UP DN INSPECTION OVERLOAD UPS
KE
MALFUNCTI ATTENDAN
FIRE LOCK CAR VIP FULL LOAD
ON T
 Precautions
Note
Indication
Accessories
The installation direction is shown in the arrow
-91-
Accessories
K-PI1200 Icon
JP7
JP4
JP6 JP3
JP2
JP8
JP9
JP1
Accessories
BELL1

JP9 Power and 24+: Positive pole of 24V power
communication supply
interface 24-: Negative pole of 24V power
supply
JP8 Program flash TXD
port RXD
0V
+3.3V
JP2 Up call interface L1: output negative pole (button light UP: rated output current
DC24V-) 50mA
-92-
Accessories

DC24V+) Parameter setting status:
UP: Up input (button) parameter value increase
V-: Upstream input common terminal
JP3 Down call L2: output negative pole (button light DN: rated output current
interface DC24V-) 50mA
V+: output positive pole (button light Parameter setting status:
DC24V+) parameter value decreases
JP4 Elevator lock LK: elevator lock input Parameter setting status:
interface V-: Elevator lock input common page on the menu
terminal
Fire interface FR: Fire input Parameter setting status:
JP6 Output port V-: Output DC24V- 4 transistor outputs
T0: Arrival bell output T0: rated output current
50mA;
50mA;
JP7 Program When the program is flashed, the 3pin
flashing & BOOT pins need to be short-circuited
parameter When setting parameters, short-circuit
setting port the two pins of SET
JP1 CAN CAN communication terminating 2pin
Communication resistor
terminating
Accessories
resistor
K-PI1200 Wiring

1. Power and EH-4Y Terminal + 4 Core twisted pair The standard
communication shielded extension cable configuration
interface
2. Up call button interface EH-4Y Terminal + 4 Core 0.3mm2 cable Select
configuration
4. Ladder lock interface & Select
5. Direction forecast and EH-6Y Terminal + 6 Core 0.3mm2 cable Select
-93-
Accessories
 Precautions
Note
not work properly!
Indication

Accessories
K-PI1200
24V
GND
CANL
CANH Twisted pair

L2 L2
V+ V+
DN DN
K-PI1200
K-PI1200
K-PI1200 K-PI1200 V- V-
L1 L1
UP UP
V- V-
-94-
Accessories

Wiring
K-PI1200
LK V- V- FR
Configuration instructions when the load Configuration instructions when the load current is greater than
current is less than 400mA： 400mA：
V-
External
V- V- power
V+
K-PI1200
V-
supply
K-PI1200
T0 T0
K-07K
T0 V-
T1 T1
T1 T0
T2 T2
T2 T1
T3 T3
V+ T2
V+ V+
V+
ll
a
Accessories
c e
d k
a
n m
d
u
o e K-PI1200 ts
e b sl l h ll
l t l p n g
i a
b u a o L c
a o c e w ts t
si k d p t o p
d h d a h u
n
il n d g c g
il
e
h n
u
o le il d
e e
r t d
e
t b ts h
T2
o
V+
p p
T3
T1
T0
LK V- V- FR
n
V-
w b
r
o o K t
u sa
i R o
tt p F a
c
g
il p
f D L a d e a
o D F u c
i r r n c
i
& b d a o o d
& n w f tt n
T T ll a p n u a
3 0 a
c H U D
w b H
o
-95-
Accessories

The left 2 pins of JP7 are inserted into the shorting cap
1. JP7 jumper pin
Save & exit the parameter setting interface:
Remove the shorting cap
jogging)
3. Down call button
Fire & Elevator Menu selection interface:
4.
Lock Button Fire jog up selection menu; lock elevator jog down selection menu;

address.
menu;
c) After the setting is completed, remove the SET jumper pin shorting
cap, and after flashing 4 times, "S OK" is displayed, indicating that
the setting is successful;
Accessories

c) After the setting is completed, long press the onboard button, wait for
the display "S OK" to indicate that the setting is successful, then
release the button;
Figure H on the left represents the reserved function setting menu
a) Press the elevator lock or fire button to switch to the reserved
function setting menu;
cap, and after flashing once, it will display "S OK" to indicate that the
setting is successful;
Parameter description: Default 10, Unit: second, Range 0~99.
-96-
Accessories

menu;
=0, Off
bit0 (1) Outgoing call arrival floor flashes 1
=1, On
=0, Off
=1, On
Internal display sliding display =0, Off
bit2 (4) 1
function =1, On
=0, Off
=1, On
=0, Off
=1, On
Disabled sharing outbound call =0, Off
bit5 (32) 1
function =1, On
Display module (left) function setting description:
The X on the left represents the left display module menu
a) Press the elevator lock or fire button to switch to the left display
module menu;
Accessories
Settings Display function Settings Display function
0 Do not show 7 MALFUNCTION
1 INSPECTION 8 EARTHQUAKE
2 FULL LOAD 9 EARTHQUAKE
3 OVERLOAD 10 VIP
4 ATTENDANT 12 UPS
5 FULL LOAD 13 Door open delay
6 FIRE
Display module (right) function setting description:
The Y on the left represents the left display module menu
a) Press the elevator lock or fire button to switch to the left display
module menu;
Settings Display function Settings Display function
0 Do not show 7 MALFUNCTION
-97-
Accessories

1 INSPECTION 8 EARTHQUAKE
2 FULL LOAD 9 EARTHQUAKE
3 OVERLOAD 10 VIP
4 ATTENDANT 12 UPS
5 FULL LOAD 13 Door open delay
6 FIRE


Display the main controller setting to display the floor
1. Segment code character display
characters.
4.
Simple and convenient to set
6. Automatic parameter saving function.
parameters
Ultra-thin dot matrix display
7. Ultra-thin installation design, PCBA thickness is 7.5mm.
control
 Precautions
NOTE
Accessories
Indication
-98-
Accessories
The installation direction is shown in the arrow
Accessories
-99-
Accessories
K-PI1300 Icon
BELL1
JP7
JP4
JP6 JP3
JP8 JP2
JP9
JP1

24+: Positive pole of 24V power
supply
24-: Negative pole of 24V power
Power and
supply
JP9 communication
interface
TXD
Program flash RXD
JP8
port 0V
+3.3V
L1: output negative pole (button light
DC24V-) UP: rated output current
V+: output positive pole (button light 50mA
Accessories
JP2 Up call interface DC24V+)

UP: Up input (button) Parameter setting status:
V-: Upstream input common terminal parameter value increase
L2: output negative pole (button light
DC24V-)
DN: rated output current
Down call 50mA
JP3 DC24V+)
interface Parameter setting status:
parameter value decreases
LK: elevator lock input Parameter setting status:
Elevator lock
V-: Elevator lock input common page on the menu
interface
JP4 terminal
FR: Fire input Parameter setting status:
Fire interface
V-: Output DC24V- 4 transistor outputs
JP6 Output port T0: Arrival bell output T0: rated output current
-100-
Accessories

50mA;
50mA;
Program When the program is flashed, the

flashing & BOOT pins need to be short-circuited
JP7 3pin
parameter When setting parameters, short-circuit
setting port the two pins of SET
CAN
Communication CAN communication terminating
JP1 2pin
terminating resistor
resistor
K-PI1300 Wiring

1. Power and EH-4Y Terminal + 4 Core twisted pair The standard
communication shielded extension cable configuration
interface
2. Up call button interface EH-4Y Terminal + 4 Core 0.3mm2 cable Select
configuration
4. Ladder lock interface & Select
5. Direction forecast and EH-6Y Terminal + 6 Core 0.3mm2 cable Select
Accessories
 Precautions
Note
not work properly!
Indication
-101-
Accessories


K-PI1300
24V
GND
CANL
CANH Twisted pair

L2 L2
V+ V+
DN DN
K-PI1300
K-PI1300
K-PI1300 K-PI1300 V- V-
L1 L1
UP UP
V- V-

Accessories
Wiring
K-PI1300
LK V- V- FR
-102-
Accessories
Configuration instructions when the load Configuration instructions when the load current is greater than
current is less than 400mA： 400mA：
V-
External
V- V- power
V+
K-PI1300
V-
supply
K-PI1300
T0 T0
K-07K
T0 V-
T1 T1
T1 T0
T2 T2
T2 T1
T3 T3
V+ T2
V+ V+
V+
ll
a e
c k
d a
n m
u K-PI1300 st
d o le h
e
l b
t lsl p g
i ll
b u a o n L a
a o c e w c
ts t
is k d p t o
d h p
u
d n n d h a g
e li u e g
il d c il d
h n o l
b e re ts t
h e
t
T2
o
V+
p p
T3
T1
T0
LK V- V- FR
b n
V-
r w t a F a g
o K is R o p il p
o
f D L u
o D F tt a
c d
r
c
e n
a
c
u i a r i
& & b
ll
d
n w
o
f to
t
d
n
T T a p n u a
3 0 a
c H U D
w b H
o
Accessories

The left 2 pins of JP7 are inserted into the shorting cap
1. JP7 jumper pin
Save & exit the parameter setting interface:
Remove the shorting cap
jogging)
3. Down call button Parameter setting interface:
-103-
Accessories

Fire & Elevator Menu selection interface:
4.
Lock Button Fire jog up selection menu; lock elevator jog down selection menu;

address.
menu;
K
C
c) After the setting is completed, long press the onboard button, wait for
the display "S OK" to indicate that the setting is successful, then
release the button;
Figure H on the left represents the reserved function setting menu
H
a) Press the elevator lock or fire button to switch to the reserved
function setting menu;
Accessories
Parameter description: Default 10, Unit: second, Range 0~99.
menu;
E
bit0 (1) Outgoing call arrival floor =0, off; 1
-104-
Accessories

flashes =1, on
=0, off;
=1, on
Internal display sliding display =0, off;
bit2 (4) 1
function =1, on
=0, off;
=1, on
=0, off;
=1, on
Disabled sharing outbound call =0, off;
bit5 (32) 1
function =1, on
Instructions for front and rear doors and disabled persons:
Figure B on the left shows the setting parameters for outbound calls from the
front and rear doors, and 0 means that a normal person makes outbound calls
from the front door.
door menu;
B
cap, and display "OK" to indicate that the setting is successful;
B=0, normal people call out from the front door;
B=1, normal people call out from the back door;
B=2, the disabled person calls out from the front door;
B=3, the disabled person calls out from the back door.
Description of group control group number:
G in the left figure represents the group control group number setting
parameter, and 0 represents no group number.
door menu;
G
Accessories
G=0, No group No.;
G≠0, The elevator corresponding to the group No. is displayed and
registered.
-105-
Accessories
4.15. Voice annunication controller installation, wiring and

adjustments
MC-VAB Function description

Destination floor voice The floor information is played before the elevator stops at the
1.
prompt destination floor.
Elevator status voice Real-time playback of elevator running status: up, down, open,
2.
prompt close, inspection, fault, overload, full load and other information.
Compatible with
3. Supterminal multi-format voice files such as mp3 and WAV.
multi-format voice files
Background music
4. Background music can be played during elevator operation.
playback
Update voice files
5. Update voice files online via SD card.
online
MC-VAB Installation
Precautions
Note
Indication
Accessories

-106-
Accessories
Installation size
W 95mm
H 75mm
W1 85mm
H1 65mm
Aperture 3.5mm
PCBA 20 mm
thickness
MC-VAB part description
MC-VAB Icon
Accessories
L Left channel
J1
AGND Ground terminal
24V+ DC 24V+ input Indication
24V- DC 24V-input Power supply characteristics:
J2
CANH CAN interface DC24V ± 15%
CANL CAN interface
J3 Serial debugging interface Firmware upgrade dedicated
J5 —— SD card socket Save audio clips
CAN communication indicator When normal, the indicator light
LE1 ——
flashes continuously
LE3 —— Voice broadcast indicator Always on after the voice broadcast
LE4 —— Power Indicator When normal, the indicator light is
-107-
Accessories

always on
MC-VAB Wiring
24V+ 24V+
DC 24V电源
24V- 24V-
J2 CANH CANH
轿顶控制板
CANL CANL
MC-VAB V3.1
J1
L AGND
扬声器
MC-VAB Adjustments
1. Check before power on
Before turning on the power, please use a multimeter to measure whether the input power is DC
24V.
2. Start the running test
After the power is turned on, wait for the CAN communication voice announcement board
(MC_VAB) to start to judge whether the system is running normally;
Judgment method: judge according to the indicator light LE4 of the CAN communication voice
announcement board (MC_VAB);
If the indicator light LE4 is always on, it means the operation is normal.
Accessories
If the indicator light LE4 flashes or does not light, it means that the operation is not normal;
please re-check the voltage or return to the manufacturer for repair.
3. Communication detection
CAN communication check, after the voice announcement board runs normally, check whether
the CAN communication is normal;
Judgment method: judge according to the indicator light LE1 of the CAN communication voice
announcement board (MC_VAB);
If the indicator light LE1 flashes continuously, it means that the CAN communication is normal.
If the indicator light LE1 is always on or off, it means that the CAN communication is not normal;
please re-check the wiring and check whether the peripheral CAN communication line is normal.
4. Recommended speaker configuration
The recommended configuration of the speaker is: power=10W, resistance=8Ω.
5. Speaker volume detection
Check the speaker volume. After the CAN communication voice announcement board (MC_VAB)
communicates normally, press the door open/close command button of the elevator, or make the
-108-
Accessories
elevator run by calling the elevator to check whether the speaker circuit of the voice
announcement system is normal.
If there is no sound from the speaker, use the screw to turn the potentiometer R2
counterclockwise to increase the volume adjustment.
If it doesn't work by adjusting the volume, check whether the speaker is in good condition, and it
is recommended to return it to the factory for repair.
6. Speaker volume adjustment
To increase the volume, turn the potentiometer R2 counterclockwise to increase the volume
adjustment.
To decrease the volume, turn the potentiometer R2 clockwise to decrease the volume adjustment.
7. Announcement prompt detection
Voice announcement prompt detection, according to the requirements, run the elevator to detect
whether each item of the voice announcement meets the requirements;
If it meets the requirements, use a screwdriver to turn R2 clockwise/counterclockwise to adjust
the volume to a suitable volume, and enter into normal use.
If it does not meet the requirements, it is recommended to return it to the factory for repair.
8. Background music
When the motherboard F0.34 bit=3, the background music function is enabled, and the
background music is played when the elevator is running
Accessories
-109-
Accessories
4.16. Re-leveling controller installation, wiring and commissioning

K-SF1000 Parts description
K-SF1000 Icon

ULM Home area The car top magnetic switch is installed
DLM Lower gate area vertically at the upper, middle and lower
DZ Zhongmen District distances . The length of the magnetic
shield is recommended to be 300mm.
When the car is accurately leveled, the
magnetic shield isinserted into three
magnetic switchesat the same time .
K1 LOW Elevator low speed signal input Conducted when the car speed is ≤0.3
m/s.
TK+ Stop contactor input Connect the main controller to control
TK- Stop contactor input the input power to let JT pull in
555 External power input 24V+ It is best to directly use the signal power
551 External power input 24V- of the elevator main controller, the
power supply capacity is not less than
280mA.
551 Power supply 24V-
K2
Accessories
SAFE Open door request in advance

DLS Door lock shorted one
K3
A22 Door lock shorted two
Dimensions
W 130mm
H 72mm
W1 120mm
H1
H
H1 62mm
Aperture 4mm
W1
PCBA thickness 26mm W
-110-
System Adjustments
5 System Adjustments
5.1. User interface description

5.1.1. Onboard Display Description
 Parts description
No. Part Name Function

Front door open limit Blinking when front door opening，always lignht when
1. OP1
signal front door open limit
Front door close limit Blinking when front door closing，always lignht when
2. CL1
signal front door close limit
Back door open limit Blinking when back door opening，always lignht when
3. OP2
signal front door open limit
Back door close limit Blinking when back door closing，always lignht when
4. CL2
signal front door close limit
Always light when normal condition，blinking when
5. RDY Ready signal
fault reseting
6. ERR Fault status indicator Always light when fault condition
 Status monitor Function description
Display Function Description Display Function Description

Indicates that the elevator is Indicates that the elevator is
currently in the door zone currently under inspection
Indicates the current floor of the Indicates the current floor of the
System Adjustments
elevator elevator
Indicates elevator up Indicates elevator down
elevator elevator
Indicates that the elevator is currently Indicates the elevator is under
in driver status locking status
elevator elevator
Indicates the elevator is under fire Indicates the elevator is under
status firemen status
elevator elevator
Indicates the elevator is under direct Indicates the elevator is under
driving status fullload status
elevator elevator
-111-
System Adjustments
Display Function Description Display Function Description

Indicates the elevator is under Indicates the elevator is under UPS
overload status status
elevator elevator
Indicates that the elevator is currently Indicates the elevator is under
in Operate independently mode emergency operation
elevator elevator
Indicates that the elevator is under Indicates that the elevator is under
car-top or car inspection pit inspection
elevator elevator
5.1.2. K-OP1002 Handheld operator Description

 Handheld operator description
Hand-held manipulator is used for debugging and maintenance of elevator system. It consists of three
parts: digital tube, buttons and LED status indicator.
 Handheld operator schematic diagram

The manipulator consists of 5 digital tubes, 6 operation keys and 10 LED status indicators. Its layout is
as follows:
UP：Uplink always bright
DN：Downlink always bright
OP1：Always bright when the front door is opened.

Blink when the front door is opening.
CL1：Always bright when the front door is closed.

Blink when the front door is closing.
OP2：Always bright when the back door is opened.

Blink when the back door is opening
CL2：Always bright when the back door is closed.

Blink when the back door is closing
RDY：Always bright when FUSION G5 not ready

Up button：
System Adjustments
ERR：Always bright when FUSION G5 error Move the cursor up

OC：Always bright when safety circle not open
CAN：Blink when operator connected function button：

Function configuration
button
Return:
Return to the previous interface
Confirm button：
Confirm current Operation
Shift key： Go to the next level menu
Cycle left when setting parameters
Down button：
Move the cursor down
Figure 1: Schematic diagram of the operator
-112-
System Adjustments
 Digital tube status
Display Description Display Description

Indicates that the elevator is in a Indicating that the elevator is in
level position inspection
Represents the current floor of the Represents the current floor of
elevator the elevator
Indicates that the elevator is going Indicates that the elevator is going
up down
Indicates that the elevator is in the
Indicates that the elevator is locked
driver state
Represents the current floor of
Represents the current floor of the
the elevator
elevator
Indicates that the elevator is in a fire Indicates that the elevator is in a
state fireman state
Indicates that the elevator is in a Indicates that the elevator is fully
direct driving state loaded
Indicates that the elevator is Indicates that the elevator is in
overloaded UPS status
Indicates that the elevator is in an Indicate the emergency electrical
independent operating state status of the equipment room
Indicating that the elevator is under Indicating that the elevator is in a
car top inspection or car inspection pit inspection state
System Adjustments
-113-
System Adjustments
 Menu flow
Main menu Submenu ENT ENT
AU=XX A0 A0.00 XXXXX
ESC ESC
ENT ESC
ESC ENT
Password
XXXXX A0.01 XXXXX
ESC
ENT
A
ENT ENT
A1 A1.00 XXXXX
ESC ESC
B
ENT
A1.01 XXXXX
ESC
C
ENT ENT
B0 B0.00 XXXXX
ESC ESC
ENT
B0.01 XXXXX
ESC
T ENT ENT
U0 U0.00 XXXXX
ESC ESC
U ENT
U0.01 XXXXX
ESC
 Shortcut Monitoring
System Adjustments
Simple monitoring can be performed by pressing the function key "FUN" through the operator, as
shown in the figure below:
FUN
FUN FUN FUN FUN

Monitor Monitor Monitor Monitor
Standby
current output current current
screen speed current pulse altitude
AU=XX XXXXX XXXXA XXXXX XXXXX
Note：Current speed unit：mm/s；Current unit：A；Current altitude unit：m
-114-
System Adjustments
 Function code menu summary

Secondary Three-level
Menu Parameter group description
menu menu
B0 B0.00～B0.13 Motor self-learning parameters
Drive B1 B1.00～B1.27 Basic parameters
control B
menu B2 B2.00～B2.15 Vector control
B3 B3.00～B3.25 Protection parameter
A A0 A0.00～A0.35 Elevator speed setting
C0 C0.001～C0.128 Front door door layout setting
C C1 C1.001～C1.128 Back door door layout settings
C2 C2.001～C2.128 Double door door layout setting
D0 D0.001～D0.128 Upper level fine-tuning
D
D1 D1.001～D1.128 Lower leveling fine-tuning
E0 E0.00～E0.05 Floor setting
E E1 E1.001～E1.128 Floor display output setting (two digits)

Floor display output setting (three highest
Elevato E2 E2.001～E2.128
digits)
r
F F0-F3 F0.00~F3.99 Custom functions
control
menu Low voltage input point logic setting of
H0 H0.01～H0.27
motherboard
H1 H1.01～H1.15 Car roof board input signal logic setting
Multi-function definition of motherboard input
H4 H4.01～H4.34
points
H Multifunction definition of motherboard output
H5 H5.01～H5.07
points
Multifunctional definition of car roof input
H6 H6.01～H6.15
signal
Multifunctional definition of car roof output
H7 H7.03～H7.07
signal
L L0 L0.00～L0.11 Parallel / group control settings System Adjustments
T T0 T0.00～T0.17 Time setting

P0 P0.00 Password setting
P1.00 Shaft self-learning
Multi-f
unction P P1 P1.01 Clear fault records
menu
P1.02 Reset
P2 P2.00～P2.05 System time setting
System U0 U0.00 Manual call function
monitor
U U1 U1.00～U1.05 System monitoring
ing
menu U2 U2.00～U2.49 Fault monitoring
-115-
System Adjustments
Secondary Three-level
Menu Parameter group description
menu menu
U3 U3.01～U3.35 Motherboard input point monitoring
U4 U4.01～U4.15 Car top input point monitoring
U5 U5.17～U5.32 Front door car board status monitoring
U6 U6.17～U6.32 Backdoor car board status monitoring
U7 U7.001～U7.128 Front door outbound communication detection
U8 U8.001～U8.128 Backdoor outbound communication detection
U9.00 System random number
U9
U9.01~U9.10 System software version information
5.1.3. PC host computer operating software

 Description of each part
No. Component Name Features
Connect the host

Computer computer and control
communication system
1.
connection
cable USB TO RS232 cable
or standard serial cable
Controller and PC connection Computer application
icon
Integrated control
2. PC software system adjustments,
fault diagnosis analysis,
system monitoring
function
Human interface device

System Adjustments
personal
3. Supterminal Win
computer
XP/Win 7 32bit & 64bit
 Function Description
No. Features Description
System
Elevator status monitoring, real-time data monitoring of elevator operation,
1. monitoring
fault inquiry, control system terminal status monitoring
function
Boot Elevator parameter configuration, host self-learning, inspection trial run, well
2.
adjustments self-learning, comfort adjustment,
-116-
System Adjustments

Level deviation adjustment
Advanced High-line parameter configuration, parameter management, software version

3.
Features query
 Instructions
Connect the computer to the K-MC1000

M-RS232 interface using a standard DB 9 serial
cable or a USB to RS232 cable.
Indication
When using the USB to RS232 model cable,

install the driver as required and record the
corresponding USB serial terminal
communication terminal.
Open and log in to the host computer software,

and follow the prompts of the host computer
software.
Indication
Please contact the manufacturer for the

authorization code.
Correctly select the serial terminal number to be

used, click the “Connect” button; establish
communication between the PC software and the
control system.
System Adjustments
Operation according to requirements: system

monitoring, system adjustments, advanced
function adjustments, parameter
uploading/downloading and other functional
operations.
-117-
System Adjustments
5.2. Controller indicator description

K-MC1000 controller indicator description
All-in-one communication status

Elevator running status indicator
indicator
LE7: Front door open limit signal light LE2: All-in-one communication status
Shining when opening the door, always indicator
bright when the door is in place Shining when communication is
LE8: Front door closing limit signal light normal
Shines when the door is closed, and
lights up when the door is closed. CPU_S running status indicator
LE9: Rear door open limit signal light
LE6: CPU reset indicator
Shining when opening the door, always
Not lit normally
bright when the door is in place
LE13: CPU normal operation indicator
LE10: Rear door closing limit signal light
Shining normally
Shines when the door is closed, and
lights up when the door is closed.
LE11: The system is ready for the signal light CPU_M running status indicator
The system is always on when it is
LE3: CPU reset indicator
normal.
Not lit normally
Shining when the fault is reset
LE4: CUP normal operation indicator
LE12: elevator fault indicator
Shining normally
Always lit when the elevator is faulty
Controller power indicator

Low voltage input point status LE52: Controller power indicator
indicator Normally bright
LE17～LE41:
Low voltage input point BB, High voltage input point status
P1~P24 status indicator
Indicator light
LE42～LE44:
Lights up when the input signal is
High voltage input point H1~H3
active
status indicator
valid
Parallel & group control
Relay output signal status indicator
communication status indicator
LE15: Parallel or group control LE45～LE51:
communication status indicator Relay output T1~T7 status
Fast flashing when indicator
communication is normal Lights up when the
Slow flash when communication corresponding output signal is valid
is not normal
System Adjustments
-118-
System Adjustments
Car top controller K-CT1000 indicator description
CAN communication status Relay input signal status

Input signal status indicator Controller power indicator
indicator indicator
LE24: P14 input signal status LE1: Power indicator LE26: Communication status LE16: Relay output T9 status indicator
monitoring indicator Always on when the indicator with all-in-one Lights up when the output signal is valid
Lights up when the input signal is system is running normally Fast flashing when LE17: Relay output T8 status indicator
active communication is normal Lights up when the output signal is valid
LE25: P15 input signal status monitor LE19: Relay output T7 status indicator
indicator Lights up when the output signal is valid
active
Front door machine status Front door machine Rear door machine status Rear door machine Car weighing switch status
monitoring indicator control status indicator monitoring indicator control status indicator indicator
LE2: front door light curtain LE6: front door open relay LE9: rear door light curtain LE13: Rear door open relay LE20: Light load switch status
signal status indicator; output indicator; signal status indicator; output indicator; monitoring indicator;
Lights up when the light Lights up when the front Lights up when the light Lights up when the rear door Lights up when the switch is activated
curtain signal is active door opens the relay curtain signal is active opens the relay output LE21: half load switch status
LE3: front door safety touch output LE10: Back door safety LE14: Rear door closing monitoring indicator;
panel signal status LE7: front door closing touch panel signal status relay output indicator; Lights up when the switch is activated
indicator; relay output indicator; indicator; Lights up when the rear door LE22: Full load switch status
Lights when the safety Lights up when the front Lights when the safety closes the relay output monitoring indicator;
touch panel signal is active door closes the relay touch panel signal is active LE15: bypass sound and Lights up when the switch is activated
LE4: front door open limit output LE11: rear door open limit light alarm relay output LE18: Overload switch status
System Adjustments
signal status indicator; LE8: front door strong signal status indicator; indicator; monitoring indicator;
Lights up when the door closing relay output Lights up when the door Lights up when the bypass Lights up when the switch is activated
open limit signal is active indicator; open limit signal is active sound and light alarm relay is LE23: Standby switch status
LE5: front door closing limit Lights up when the front LE12: rear door closing output monitoring indicator;
signal status indicator; door is forced to close the limit signal status indicator; Lights up when the switch is activated
Lights when the door relay output Lights when the door
closing limit signal is valid closing limit signal is valid
-119-
System Adjustments
Car controller K-CC1000 indicator description
1-16 layer button status

Input signal indicator Input signal indicator
indicators
LE3~LE18: LE24～LE32: LE19~LE23:
Button signal P1~P24 status Input signal P22～P30 status Input signal P17～P21 status
indicator indicator indicator
Lights when the button signal is Lights up when the input signal is Lights up when the input signal is
active active active
CAN communication status

Controller power indicator indicator
LE1: Power indicator LE2: Communication status indicator

System Adjustments
with all-in-one
Always on when the
system is running normally Fast flashing when communication
is normal
-120-
System Adjustments
5.3. System adjustments flow chart

Start
Installation & installation check
Wiring & wiring check
System power
• Is the line checked?
• Check that the parameter configuration is
Configuring system parameters correct?
• Elevator speed, number of landings • Check that the main circuit contacts are
• Motor configuration parameters good?
• Encoder configuration parameters • Check if the motor self-learning conditions
• Electrical logic configuration are met?
Motor self-learning
Is the motor self-learning successful? No
Yes
Inspection run
• Check if the peripheral electrical circuit is normal?

• Check if the encoder phase sequence is correct?
• Check that the motor is rotating in the right direction?
• Check that the pulse count direction is correct?
Is it working properly? No
Yes
The elevator runs to the position of the bottom door

area, and the elevator shaft self-learning System Adjustments
Door machine debugging
Express test run
Comfort adjustment & leveling adjustment
Function debugging
End
-121-
System Adjustments
5.4. System Configuration Parameters

Default
No. Input data Description Setting range
value
According to the elevator nominal
speed setting.
1. RATED SPEED 100～8000 1750
Unit：mm/s Reference
Value:NA
Elevator actual speed setting.
2. 100～[RATED
MAX SPEED Unit:mm/s Reference 1750
SPEED]
Value:NA
Set according to the number of
partitions installed on the shaft.
3. TOTAL FLOOR 2～64 10
Unit:NA Reference
Value:NA
Set according to the configured motor
type.
4. MOTOR TYPE 2：Asynchronous motor control 0～5 5
5：Synchronous motor control
Unit:NA Reference Value:NA
Set according to the nameplate of the
5. RATED POWER motor. 0.1～200.0 6.4
Unit:kW Reference Value:NA
6. POLE NUMBER motor. 2～48 20
7. RATED CURRENT motor. 0.1～500.0 15
Unit:A Reference Value:NA
8. RATED VOLTAGE motor. 0～480 300
BACK EMF
Unit:V Reference Value:NA
9. RATED FREQUEN motor. 0.00～600.00 15.9
Unit:Hz Reference Value:NA
10. RATED RPM motor. 1～36000 95
System Adjustments
Unit:rpm/min Reference Value:NA

11. NOLOAD CURRENT motor. 0.0～500.0 0
Unit:A Reference Value:NA
Set according to the configured
encoder type.
12. ENCODER TYPE 0：ABZ incremental encoder 0～7 2
2：1387 encoder
Set according to the number of
13. RESOLUTION encoder nominal pulses. 100～20000 2048
Unit:ppr Reference Value:NA
According to the peripheral
electrical, switch logic configuration
14. MBC INPUT LOGIC NA NA
settings.
0：Normally open
-122-
System Adjustments
Default
value
1：Normally closed
settings.
15. CT INPUT LOGIC NA NA
0：Normally open
1：Normally closed
settings.
16. CC INPUT LOGIC NA NA
0：Normally open
1：Normally closed
Note
 K-MC1000 main chip A1.4 software version and above, "safety door lock detection" menu
function is invalid, use high voltage detection or low voltage detection depends on "advanced
adjustments menu → optional function configuration → motherboard input point definition"
 Factory default high pressure detection.
System Adjustments
-123-
System Adjustments
5.5. Motor static self-learning

Motor static self-learning flow chart
Srart
Wiring & Electrical Circuit Inspection

• Please ensure that the motor UVW wiring, grounding wire
and encoder connection are reliable.
• Make sure the brake is fully closed.
• Make sure the safety circuit is connected to the door lock
loop.
• Please make sure the elevator is in service.
• Please make sure that the car top and the car are unmanned.
Reconfigure motor or encoder parameters
Are the motor and encoder parameters No

configured correctly?
Yes Re-repair motor self-learning conditions:

1) The drive is working properly (the controller RDY indicator is always on).
2) The elevator is in the “emergency electric” or “overhaul” state.
3) The safety loop is turned on.
4) The door lock and the car door lock loop are connected.
Select "Static Self-learning" 5) The controller "Brake output" signal point is not active.
6) The controller "Brake contactor feedback signal" is not active.
7) The controller "Brake Trip Switch Feedback Signal" does not operate.
8) The controller "Run contactor feedback signal" is not active.
9) The controller "BB signal" is not active.
Are you ready? No
Yes Please refer to the

"Troubleshooting" section and
re-check wiring and
Please follow the operator's "confirm"
installation issues.
button to implement self-learning
Perform self-learning again
after troubleshooting the
cause
The system automatically picks up the
main loop contactor and enters the
System Adjustments
self-learning state.
The system prompts "Motor self-
learning..."
Please wait for self-learning to end.
Is self-study successful? No
Yes
Show "self-learning success"
Inspection run
End
-124-
System Adjustments
Motor static self-learning condition
NO. Motor static self-learning condition Fusion board status

1. The driver is working properly Controller RDY indicator is steady
2. The elevator is in "emergency electric" or P14 or P15 input signal indicator is not lit
"inspection" condition.
3. Safety circuit conduction. H3 input signal indicator is always on
4. Hall lock and car door lock circuit H1 & H2 input signal indicator is always on
conduction.
5. Controller "brake output" signal point is T2 output signal indicator is not lit
not active.
6. The controller "brake contactor feedback P11 input signal indicator is always on
signal" is not active.
7. Controller "Brake Stroke Switch P12 & P22 input signal indicator is always on
Feedback Signal" is not active.
8. Controller "Run contactor feedback P10 input signal indicator is always on
signal" is not active.
9. Controller "BB signal" is not active. BB input signal indicator is not lit
Precautions
Danger
Safety measures for static autotune of motor
• Make sure that the elevator car, car roof, and elevator shaft are left unattended. Failure to do so
could result in death or serious injury.
• Make sure that the safety conditions around the motor and the elevator are autotune, personal
accidents may occur due to sudden motor start-up.
Caution
• Autotune motor adopts one-key autotune operation mode, so be sure to follow the motor autotune
flow chart in autotune process.
• If any condition detected during motor learning is not satisfied, the motor will not be able to learn
or interrupt the current autotune status.
System Adjustments
Prohibited
• During motor autotune, if any abnormal condition (such as driver whistle and obvious burning
smoke or smell) is found, please immediately disconnect the "emergency stop" button and
interrupt motor self-learning.
• During autotune motor autotune failure, please interrupt the motor autotune operation.
Guidance
• Since static autotune does not detect the direction of the encoder, after a correct autotune of the
motor, the human will make the motor rotate an angle, redo the motor autotune, and record and
compare the initial position of the magnetic pole. (The error value is less than the number of poles
of the motor), it is considered that the motor autotune is successful, and the next step can be
performed; otherwise, re-calibrate the motor and encoder parameters to redo the motor autotune.
• During the first overhaul test operation, please judge the running direction of the elevator and
-125-
System Adjustments
avoid the collision. If the overhaul direction is opposite to the actual running direction of the
elevator, check the corresponding wiring or change the rotation direction of the motor.
• Monitor the output current, overhaul the maintenance, the current is normal, that autotune has been
completed correctly, or check the relevant parameters and related connections.
Host self-learning exception handling

 Prompt "Motor autotune is not ready"
To recheck the "Static Motor Learning Conditions", you must ensure that all conditions are met.
Cause Possible Solutions
Motor static autotune  Make sure the drive is working properly (controller RDY indicator is
conditions are not steady).
satisfied  Make sure the elevator is in "emergency power" or "overhaul" status.
 Confirm that the safety circuit is on.
 Confirm hall lock and car door lock circuit conduction.
 Confirm that the controller "brake output" signal point (factory
default T2 output point) is not operating.
 Confirm that the controller "Brake contactor feedback signal" is not
active.
 Confirm that the controller "Brake Stroke Switch Feedback Signal"
is not active.
 Confirm that the controller "Run contactor feedback signal" is not
active.
 Confirm that the controller "BB signal" is not active.
 Prompt "motor autotune failure"
Motor autotune  Correctly set the motor nameplate parameters.

system reported 122 #  Check the number of encoder lines.
fault  Confirm the encoder wiring.

System Adjustments
Check whether the encoder is in good condition.
Motor autotune  Controller output running contactor signal, no signal feedback.

system reported 220 #  Check if the contactor is operating properly.
fault  Confirm that the controller operates the contact detection signal
for feedback.
 Check whether the controller BB detects whether there is feedback
signal.
 The controller does not output brake contact signal, there is signal
feedback.
 Abnormal interruption of the motor autotune process
-126-
System Adjustments
Safety circuit  Make sure the safety circuit is switched on during motor learning.
disconnected
The door lock circuit  Make sure the door lock circuit is turned on during motor autotune.
is disconnected
Inspection or  Make sure the motor overhaul or emergency power switch is in

emergency electric service or emergency power position during autotune.
switch reset
System Adjustments
-127-
System Adjustments
5.6. Motor dynamic correction

Dynamic correction flowchart
Start
Motor self-learning completed
No
Elevator trial operation is normal
When the car is empty, the

elevator runs to the top
No
Yes
Reconfirm motor Select the "Dynamic Correction"

dynamic correction menu
conditions
No Are you ready?
Yes
Please follow the operator's "confirm"
button to implement dynamic correction The system continues to
prompt: dynamic
correction...
Press the emergency electric down button
System prompt: dynamic correction...
Make sure that the elevator inspection
stops at a steady speed for 5 seconds.
No
Is the dynamic correction

successful?
System Adjustments
Yes
System prompt: Dynamic
correction succeeded
End
-128-
System Adjustments
Dynamic correction condition
NO. Dynamic correction condition Fusion board status

1. Motor autotune is completed. /
2. Elevator in "emergency electric" state, P14 input signal indicator is off, P15 input signal
non-inspection state. indicator is always on.
3. Inspection test run through. /
4. Upper & lower limit switches of the shaft P6 & P7 input signal indicator is always on
do not move.
5. The controller system has no trouble in Fault signal indicator is not lit
the "emergency electric" state.
Precautions
Danger
 Please ensure that the elevator car, car roof and elevator shaft are not operated under the condition
of no one. Otherwise, it may cause death or serious injury.
Caution
 Please strictly follow the flowchart.
 When performing motor dynamic correction, make the elevator operate under the condition of
dragging (for example, lift the car in the top position for maintenance without load).
 During motor dynamic correction, please make sure elevator maintenance stops running steadily
for 5 seconds.
 If the maintenance operation is stopped, the system will still display "Dynamic Correction ..."
Please repeat the dynamic correction operation.
System Adjustments
-129-
System Adjustments
5.7. Elevator trial run

Elevator trial run flow chart
Start
No
Confirm that the elevator operating

conditions are met
• Modify the encoder phase
sequence
"A phase ahead" or "B
phase ahead"
According to the car position Modify the pulse
• Reconfirm encoder
Perform emergency electric up or down Modify the direction count direction
connection line sequence
operations of motor rotation "Pulse positive count"
• Reconfirm motor
Emergency electric must be guaranteed "forward" or "reverse" or "pulse reverse
parameters
Up and down normal operation once count"
• Does the drive power
match? No
Yes No
Is the motor running normally?

Car running direction System pulse count
No Is the elevator monitoring Yes Yes
is it right or not? is it right or not?
normal?
Yes Yes
Yes
Replace the emergency electric running

direction and repeat the trial operation
End
Elevator trial operation conditions
NO. Elevator trial operation conditions Fusion board status

System Adjustments
1. The elevator is in an "emergency P14 input signal indicator is

electric" state, not under inspection. off, P15 input signal indicator
is always on.
2. Motor autotune operation is completed, /
and prompts "autotune success" logo.
3. Elevator safety circuit is normal. H3 input signal indicator is
always on
4. Elevator hall door locks and car door H1 & H2 input signal indicator
lock are made. is always on
5. The controller has no fault. Fault signal indicator is not lit
6. All switches are working properly. /
7. The shaft electrical switches are working P6 & P7 input signal indicator
normally (upper & lower limit switches is always on
do not operate).
8. Ensure that no one is in the shaft, the car /
top, inside the car. Ensure that the shaft
-130-
System Adjustments
is clear from any obstruction.

9. To ensure that the above conditions, and /
suitable for safe operation of the elevator.
Elevator trial operation precautions
Danger
Caution
 Be sure to ensure that the local limit switch and the upper and lower limit switches operate
normally and reliably.
Elevator trial operation
1) Operating room emergency operation using the UP/DN &

COM buttons inside the controller.
2) Check the operation of the motor.
3) Check the current of the motor.
4) Monitor the elevator running direction to make sure it is
consistent with the given direction
5) Monitoring pulse counting direction with the given direction
6) Run the car on emergency operation in both directions a few
times to enoure the proper operation.
Elevator trial operation exception handling

 Motor operation is abnormal

Autotune motor is not  Please redo Autotune
successful System Adjustments
 Please modify the phase sequence of the encoder, lead ahead of
Encoder phase phase A or ahead of phase B, and repeat the motor autotune
sequence is incorrect
operation after the modification is completed.
 Change the configured PG card and encoder link, and repeat motor
Encoder wiring error
autotune operation.
 Elevator running direction and the given direction is inconsistent

The motor is rotating  Modify the motor rotation direction (forward or reverse).
in the wrong direction
 Pulse counting direction and the given direction is inconsistent
-131-
System Adjustments
Controller recognizes  Modify the pulse count direction (forward or reverse).

pulse counting in
reverse
5.8. Elevator shaft self-learning

Well self-learning process
Start
Elevator maintenance test run

normally
Elevator maintenance operation to the

bottom door area
Well self-learning condition Reconfirm the self-

confirmation learning conditions of
the well
Yes
Is it satisfied? No
Yes
Confirm elevator shaft self-learning
operation menu
Press the emergency electric up button to
automatically run the elevator up
System Adjustments
The elevator automatically runs up to

the top door area at the inspection
speed and stops automatically.
No
Whether to prompt
"The well is self-learning
success"?
Yes
The system will automatically save the

well self-learning data.
End
-132-
System Adjustments
Well self-learning condition
NO. Well self-learning condition Fusion motherboard status (default state)

1. Inspection test run through. /
2. The elevator is in "emergency electric" P14 input signal indicator is off, P15 input signal
state. indicator is always on.
3. The safety circuit is normal. H3 input signal indicator is always on
4. Hall door locks and car door lock are H1 & H2 input signal indicator is always on
made.
5. Closed in place signal is valid Operator monitors the door closing signal action
6. The car is in the lower level zone and the P2 input signal indicator is always on
door zone signal is valid.
7. Down slowdown switch action. P4 input signal indicator is not lit
8. Up slowdown switch dose not action. P5 input signal indicator is always on
9. Up normal limit signal is not active. P7 input signal indicator is always on
10. If the elevator is installed with terminal /
limit switches, and make sure the
switches are on and the logic of the
corresponding controller is set correctly.
11. Make sure that each switch of the /
electrical circuit is working normally and
the action is effective.
12. Ensure that no one is in the shaft, the car /
top, inside the car. Ensure that the shaft
is clear from any obstruction.
13. Ensure that meet the above conditions, /
and suitable for safe operation of the
elevator.
Self-learning considerations
Danger
System Adjustments
Caution
 Make sure that the local limit switch is operating normally and reliably.
Self-learning exception handling

 Shaft learn process reported Er.211 failure

The total floor setting is different  Check the total floor parameter settings.
from the number of separators  check door zone sensor switch or door zone signal feedback
installed by self-learning point is wrong or not action.
 Check the number of partitions installed.
-133-
System Adjustments
 Shaft learn process reported Er.212failure

Pulse error (including no  When the elevator is on the upside, the current height of
self-learning pulse feedback, the monitoring elevator is reduced; please adjust according
pulse inversion) to the instructions of the shaft learn step.

After learning the top S2W does  Check S2W switch and controller corresponding input
not move point is normal.

S1W does not reset during  Check whether the corresponding input point of S1W
self-learning switch and controller is normal.
System Adjustments
-134-
System Adjustments
5.9. Door machine adjustments

Flow chart
Start
Well self-learning completed
Check the door machine debugging conditions:

• Well self-learning completed
• The door machine works normally and there
is no fault
• The elevator is in a flat position
• The car roof is working properly
• The car top board and door machine
controller are wired correctly
Switch door operation check
When the car door & hall door

is completely closed, press the When the car door & hall door
“Car top maintenance up & car is not closed, press the "car top
top maintenance down” button maintenance up or car top
• Recheck the door at the same time. maintenance down" button • Recheck the door
machine debugging machine debugging
conditions conditions
Yes Yes
• Check if the door drive is • Check if the door drive is
set correctly set correctly
No Do you open the door? Do you close the door? No
Yes Yes
Check the door open limit Check the door closing limit
signal when the car door & hall signal when the car door & hall
door is fully open door is completely closed
• Check if the door encoder • Check if the door encoder
and self-learning are normal; and self-learning are normal;
Yes Yes
• Check if the door limit switch • Check if the door limit switch
is installed correctly. is installed correctly.
• Check if the car top board • Check if the car top board
communication is normal Controller monitoring Controller monitoring communication is normal
No Does the door open limit signal Is the door closing signal No
operate? action?
Yes Yes
Reset car top inspection switch
System Adjustments
The elevator is transferred to the automatic
state for debugging
Operate COP "Open Button" & "Close Button"

• Check switch door button wiring
Check the elevator switch door timing?
Is the timing normal? No
Block light curtain or safety touch panel signal • Check the light curtain or safety
Check if the elevator stops the door closing action? touch panel wiring
• Check the light curtain or safety
Yes touch panel power supply
Elevator stop closing No
End
-135-
System Adjustments
Door machine adjustments conditions
1） The elevator is in a flat position.

2） The service loop works normally.
3） The car top board and door machine controller are
wired correctly.
4） The door machine works normally .
5） The car roof is working properly.
6） The car top board communicates with the controller
normally.
7） The light curtain & safety touch panel works fine.
Precautions
Danger
 There is high voltage on the car top, please don't touch the terminals at will; otherwise there is
danger of electric shock!
 Before removing the terminal protection cover and before wiring inspection, be sure to
disconnect the circuit breaker of the input power circuit, otherwise there is danger of electric
shock!
 Be sure to install the terminal cover before applying power.
Note
 Please operate the professional elevator operator, otherwise there is danger of electric shock or
personal injury or injury.
 The car top controller and the door machine circuit are connected in strict accordance with the
electrical schematic diagram , and the door machine power-on adjustments can be performed only
when the wiring is correct and the communication is normal.
System Adjustments
Indication
 Due to the wide variety of door machines, only the control of the inverter door machine and the
setting of related parameters are explained here. For details, please refer to the door machine to
debug the mobile phone.
 Before starting the door machine adjustments, please make sure that the CAN communication
between the integrated machine control board and the car top controller is normal.
Door machine adjustments exception handling

 Wiring error
The reason Countermeasures
Wiring error between door Check the wiring between the door machine and the car top controller
-136-
System Adjustments
machine and car top one by one according to the electrical schematic.
controller
Abnormal communication
System reterminaled 11# Check if the car top power supply is working properly?
failure
Check if the communication line between the car top board and the
controller is normal?
Check if the CAN communication line termination resistance is
normal?
 Door open limit signal monitoring abnormal
Wiring error Door open limit signal consistent with the electrical wiring diagram
between the car roof and the door controller to confirm the controller.
The control CTB logic signal is provided, to modify the properties normally open or
systemattributes door open normally closed door open limit signal.
limitsignal (normally open
Or modify the door controller the door open limit signal output
/ normally closed) is
attributes.
inconsistent with the actual
configuration
hardware malfunction Replace the controller. For the replacement of the controller, please
contact our sales office or head of sales.
 Door closing limit signal abnormality monitoring
Wiring error Door closing limit signal consistent with the electrical wiring diagram
between the car roof and the door controller to confirm the controller.
System Adjustments
System OFF gate CTB logic signal is provided, to modify the properties normally open or
controlsignal properties normally closed door close limit signal.
limit(normally open /
Or modified door controller door closing limit signal output attributes.
normally closed) is
inconsistent with the actual
configuration
hardware malfunction Replace the controller. For the replacement of the controller, please
contact our sales office or head of sales.
 The elevator cannot open the door
The elevator is in a fault After confirming the fault, solve it according to the corresponding fault
operation countermeasures.
-137-
System Adjustments
The elevator is in fireman Exit the firefighter control mode.

control mode
Door machine stall Clean up the ridge.
Improper installation Re- adjust the doorknife position .

ofdoorknife
 The elevator cannot close the door
The elevator is in a fault After confirming the fault, solve it according to the corresponding fault
operation countermeasures.
Light curtain signal point Check whether the light curtain is blocked by the object.
action
Check the light curtain for impurities on the filter, causing the light
curtain to malfunction.
Check if the left and right of the light curtain installation are aligned.
Set the car top signal logic to modify the normally open or normally
closed properties of the light curtain signal.
Or modify the light curtain controller signal output properties.
Safety touch panel signal Check if the safety touch panel is blocked by an object.
point action
Check the filter on the safety touch panel for impurities, which may
cause the safety touch panel to malfunction.
Check if the left and right sides of the safety touch panel are aligned.
Set the car top signal logic to modify the normally open or normally
closed properties of the safety touch panel signal.
Or modify the safety touch panel controller signal output properties.
Fire switch action Disconnect the fire switch.

Set the normally open or normally closed properties of the fire switch.
System Adjustments
Overload switch action Set the normally open or normally closed properties of the overload
switch.
Adjust the car weighing switch threshold.
Commissioner Service Disconnect the commissioner service switch.

Switch Action
Set the Commissioner Service switch to the normally open or normally
closed property.
The door open button The door open button is stuck.

signal is always valid
Check the door open button wiring.
 The door opening torque cannot be maintained
-138-
System Adjustments
Door machine controller Plus door controller to open the door to keep in place the moment.
parameter adjustment is not
If the above parameters are invalid, you can modify the controller's
in place
door type configuration parameters and set it to “maintain torque output
after door opening is in place”.
Note: When setting the above configuration, make sure that the
door motor is not hot.
 The closing torque is not maintained
Door machine controller Plus controller door closing arrival holding torque.
parameter adjustment is not
If the above parameters are invalid, you can modify the controller's
in place
door type configuration parameters and set it to “maintain torque output
after closing the door”.
Note: When setting the above configuration, make sure that the
door motor is not hot.
System Adjustments
-139-
System Adjustments
5.10. High speed test run

High speed train trial flow chart
Start
Condition check
Yes
Maintenance operation is normal

Re-commission
The door machine is commissioned
Are you ready? No
Yes
Express test run
Yes
Single-layer express train up and

down
Double-decker express up & down
Multi-layer express train up & down
Top and bottom express trains up and

down
System Adjustments
End
High speed test run condition

1） The inspection and test operation is normal.
2） The door machine is adjustments normally.
3） The safety loop is normal.
4） The safety components are normal.
5） The hall door & car door lock loop is normal.
6） The safety circuit & door lock circuit is not shorted.
7） The upper and lower strong reduction switches on the shaft are normal.
8） The upper and lower limit switches on the shaft are normal.
9） The door layout is configured correctly.
10） All signal monitoring points are normal and the controller is fault free.
-140-
System Adjustments
Precautions
Danger
 Make sure the protection switch of safety circuit is effective.
 Make sure the safety circuit and door lock circuit are not shorted.
 Make sure the shaft and car top are empty.
Caution
 Be sure to ensure that the slowdown limit switches at all levels and the local limit switches operate
normally and reliably;
 Be sure to confirm that shaft learn has succeeded. The logic settings of the input points of the
mainboard and car controller are correct.
 Run the car to a terminal landing on inspection. Ensure that the position indicator is set. Turn
the car to normal operation. The door will cycle once. Ensure communication or both car and
hall call are normal.
Guidance
 During the test run of the high speed operation, please follow the distribution pattern of top floor
single floor run down, top floor two floor run down, bottom floor single floor up, bottom floor two
floor up, middle floor single floor, middle floor multi-floor run to top and bottom floor.
 During the test run of the high speed operation, make sure that the elevator door is normal, the
acceleration and deceleration are normal, and the start & stop are normal.
 Monitor elevator start & current at high speed.
 Monitor the maximum running speed of the elevator.
High speed test run exception handling

During the trial run of the high speed train, if an abnormal situation occurs, please perform the
exception processing according to the corresponding fault code displayed by the controller.
5.11. Comfort adjustment

Precautions
Danger
 Make sure all the protection switches in the safety circuit are normal and reliable.
 Make sure that the car door and the hall door lock are not short-circuited, and the door locks System Adjustments
operate normally and reliably.
 Ensure that the switch at all levels and the switch at upper & lower limit are normal and reliable.
 Confirmed that the high speed train passed the test operation.
Caution
Affect the comfort of elevator operation with mechanical factors, electrical and human factors, etc .;
troubleshooting process needs to be analyzed according to the actual situation.
 Mechanical factors:
a) Guide shoe tightness, rope tension, rail verticality, smoothness at the junction and so on.
b) All aspects of the work of the mechanical system Coordination status is the most fundamental
factor determining the comfort of the elevator. The electrical parameters can only coordinate the
mechanical system and further improve the comfort of the elevator.
c) If there is a problem with the mechanical system that affects comfort, controller parameter tuning
only improves comfort and does not fundamentally change defects due to mechanical causes.
-141-
System Adjustments
 Electrical factors:
a) Parameter setting of running curve: Acceleration, deceleration, S curve corner time, start brake
delay, parking brake delay and so on;
b) Vector control related PI parameter settings: proportional gain, integral and so on.
Guidance
 Machine-related factors adjustment
a) Rail
b) Rail surface roughness
c) Rail installation verticality
d) Connector between the guide handle
Rail verticality and two rails equal degree of control within the scope of the national standard. If
the error is too large, it will affect the elevator comfort at high speeds, jitter or vibration, or in some
places the car shaking around.
Poor handling of the rail connector can cause a step feeling when the elevator is operating in
certain fixed positions.
e) Guide shoe tightness
Boots are too tight to start the boot is easy to produce a sense of the stairs, easy to produce
parking brake; guide shoe is too loose when the car is easy to produce a sense of shaking.
If the guide shoe is sliding, there should be a small amount of clearance between the guide shoe
and the guide rail. If there is no gap, even the guide shoe rubs the guide rail surface, will make the
elevator appear vibration or step sense when starting and stopping.
Commissioning, can be in the car top, with the hard left and right foot car, such as the car can
obviously left and right direction there is a little displacement.
f) Rope tension uniformity
Unbalanced wire rope tension, there will be a few tens of tensions when the elevator is running,
some of the loose force and jitter or vibration, the elevator start, high-speed operation, parking
have an impact.
Commissioning, the elevator can be parked in the middle floor, the same in the car top by hand,
pulling each wire rope. If the distance is about the same, then the rope tensioned evenly; if the
distance is not the same, you must allow the installer to adjust the rope tension uniformity.
In addition, the wire rope before the installation circled bundled, there is a response within the
torsional stress, direct installation, easy to produce vibration elevator operation. Therefore, before
the wire rope should be fully released before the release of such torsional stress.
System Adjustments
g) Car installation and fastening, sealing

When the elevator is running at high speeds, the whole car is greatly stressed. If a certain part of the
car support or the car wall is not fastened, when the elevator runs at high speed, it is likely that a
relative wrong movement occurs at the part to make the car vibrate. During high-speed elevator
operation, the car sometimes wind resonance sounds, and more with the car installation tightness,
car sealing and shaft. Is there any anti-mechanical resonance device.
h) The traction machine rests the steel beam under rubber mat.
It is also advantageous to eliminate the vibration by using a wood chuck or other similar device at
the rope end of the car wire rope.
At present, some elevators in pursuit of decorating effect, the car uses a new lightweight materials,
the car lighter, easy to produce "mechanical resonance", especially high-speed elevators.
Occurrence of this phenomenon, the car can be appropriate to add some load change the car's
natural frequency, to eliminate mechanical resonance.
i) Tractor
Sometimes the traction machine due to improper assembly, worm gear or meshing between the
-142-
System Adjustments
poor; or use a long time, worm gear or wear larger, there will be acceleration or deceleration when
the elevator has axial movement, resulting in acceleration or Deceleration when a sense of step.
j) Car balance problem
Sometimes due to the design or installation and other reasons, leading to unbalanced car quality
and tilt to one side, elevator operation, the guide shoe rub the rail surface, the operation of jitter or
vibration. At this point, heavier weight test can be added on the side of the car.
k) Others
Such as traction machine duplexism guide wheel, run-time brake clearance adjustment.
l) Adjustment of electrical related factors
The main electrical factors that affect comfort are the performance of the speed profile, the degree
to which the analog speed signal is affected by electromagnetic interference (if using an analog
speed reference), the quality of the encoder feedback signal, and the driveability of the drive.
Start Rolling / Vibrating

Default
value
Start vibration occurs, reduce the set value;
When starting to roll back, increase the
1. START P GAIN 0～100 30
setting value.
Unit:NA Reference Value:30
Start vibration occurs, increase the set value;
When starting to roll back, decrease the
2. START I TIME 0～1000 10
setting.
Unit:ms Reference Value:10
When starting to roll back, turn on the
position lock function.
POSITION
3. 0: disabled 0～1 1
LOCK
1: Enabled.
Guidance
 Increase "Start Proportional Gain" setting to no vibration at zero speed.
 At zero speed, decrease the "Startup Integration Time" setting to no vibration.

System Adjustments
To adjust the start-up or back-slip phenomenon, adjust the Start Proportional Gain and Startup
Integral Time parameters according to the actual conditions in the field.
Start with speed gate

Default
value
1. Set the given operating direction to output
BRAKE OPEN
the brake contactor time. 0～1000 500
DELAY
2. Set the time at which the brake contactor is
CURVE GIVE output and receives the feedback signal to a
0～3000 500
DELAY given speed profile.
Guidance
-143-
System Adjustments
Run contactor output
Run contactor feedback
Direction given
Timer
Brake open delay Curve given delay
Brake contactor output
Brake contactor feedback
Choking feeling at start

Default
value
START DWELL Set DWELL speed to maintain time.
1. 0～65535 0
TIME Unit:ms Reference Value:5
START DWELL Set DWELL to maintain speed.
2. 0～65535 0
SPD Unit:mm/s Reference Value:500
Guidance
 After this function is enabled, the impact caused by large static friction when starting can be
reduced.
 When the parameter is set to a value other than 0, the DWELL function becomes effective.
Low-speed Oscillation / Jitter

Default
value
Low speed shock occurs, increase the set
value;
LOW SPEED P
1. When jitter occurs at low speed, decrease the 0～100 20
GAIN
setting value.
System Adjustments
Low speed shock, reduce the set value;

LOW SPEED I When jitter occurs at low speed, increase the
2. 0～1000 50
TIME setting value.
Guidance
-144-
System Adjustments
Default
value
 ASR adjustment of speed control during vector control
 Vector control speed control (ASR) is a torque command that sets the deviation between the speed
command and the speed detection value (PG feedback or speed estimation value) to zero.
The figure below shows the speed control (ASR) block diagram of vector control.
Frequency Proportional Torque bias
gain command Torque filter Torque
instruction
+ + command
P F
+ + Torque limit
Feedback
frequency I
Integration time Points limit

d
e
ASR control blockpeS diagram
r
o
Fine tuning of the speed control (ASR) t
o
M
Speed control of the proportional gain
(If the gain is too large resonance will occur)
proportional gain
Set the proportional gain of the speed control
(ASR) to adjust the speed control (ASR)
Speed control proportional gain is small
responsiveness. Increasing the setting increases
the responsiveness. In general, the larger the
load, the larger the setting. However, too much
can cause vibration.
The following shows an example of the response Time
when adjusting the proportional gain of speed d

e
e
control (ASR). p
Response
S when changing the proportional gain
r
o
t
Fine tuning of the speed control (ASR) o
M
Speed control integration time is short
integration time
Set the integral time of speed control (ASR) to
adjust the speed control (ASR) responsiveness. If
Speed control integral time is long
the integration time becomes longer, the
response becomes lower, and feedback on the
input becomes weaker. If the integration time is
too short will produce vibration.
The following shows an example of the response
Time
when adjusting the speed control (ASR)
integration time.
Response time when changing integration time System Adjustments
 Low speed adjustment
When connecting real load, please adjust it at zero speed. Please increase the low-speed
proportional gain as much as possible without vibration, and reduce the low-speed integral time as
much as possible without vibration.
High-speed oscillation / jitter

Default
value
High-speed shock, increasing the set value;
HIGH SPD P When high-speed jitter occurs, decrease the
1. 0～100 20
GAIN setting value.
HIGH SPD I High-speed shock, reduce the set value;
2. 0～1000 50
TIME When jitter occurs at high speed, increase the
-145-
System Adjustments
Default
value
setting value.
Guidance
 High-speed adjustment of the area
 Please adjust under normal operation. In the absence of vibration under the premise of increasing
the high-speed proportional gain, reducing high-speed integration time.
Stopping with speed

Default
value
Time from withdrawal of speed to retraction
BRAKE OFF
1. of the brake. 0～1000 500
DELAY
A minimum operating speed of the elevator
ZERO
2. before closing. 0～100 6
THRESHOLD
Unit:mm/s Reference Value:6
The system sends a curve run command to the
motor to execute the response time
MOTOR LAG
3. difference, the user generally do not need to 10～1000 10
TIME
change this parameter.
Guidance
 When the elevator speed is not reduced to zero speed, the motor brake will be closed, which will
affect the comfort of elevator operation. Increase or decrease the brake drop delay time according
to the actual running status.
 When the elevator speed is lower than the value set by the zero speed threshold, the zero speed
running sequence will be executed.
Stopping at zero speed with rolling car

Default
value
Time from withdrawal of speed to retraction
BRAKE OFF
1. of the brake. 0～1000 500
DELAY
System Adjustments

Retract from the brake to the direction of
DIR. OFF
2. withdrawal time. 0～1000 700
DELAY
Gradually cut off the motor output torque of
TORQUE HOLD
3. the power transition time. 0.00～2.50 0.00
TIME
Unit:s Reference Value:0.00
Guidance
 The motor brake is closed with a certain mechanical delay. If the output signal is turned off too
fast, the driver will cancel the current and cause the elevator to slip. The above please reduce the
brake closing delay and increase the direction to cancel the delay Time.
Motor noise
Default
value
-146-
System Adjustments
Default
value
To reduce interference and leakage current,
the switching frequency (carrier frequency)
CARRIER
1. of the driver output transistor can be 2.0～16.0 8.0
FREQUEN
adjusted.
Unit:kHz Reference Value:8.0
Guidance
Please adjust the carrier frequency as follows
 When the wiring distance between driver and motor is too long, lower the carrier frequency.
Please refer to the following table to set the carrier frequency:
Wiring distance 50m below 100m below 100m above
Carrier frequency
0.0～15.0kHz 0.0～10.0kHz 0.0～5.0kH
setting
 When the speed and torque are unstable at The following figure shows the drive overload
low speed, lower the carrier frequency. current decrement:
 When the interference from the driver has an Overload current decreasing value
impact on the surrounding machines, lower 100%

the carrier frequency.
80%
 When the leakage current generated by the
driver is large, lower the carrier frequency.
50%
 When the metal noise generated by the motor
is large, increase the carrier frequency.
 As the carrier frequency increases, the Carrier
overload current of the driver is decremented, frequency
and the drive overload can be detected even 0 10kHz 15kHz
when the overload current is less than 150%. Drive overload current decreases
Torque to cancel the noise

Default
value
Gradually cut off the motor output torque of
TORQUE the power transition time
1. 0.00～2.50 0.00
HOLD TIME Unit:S Reference Value:0.2～0.4
Guidance
System Adjustments
Please configure according to the actual situation.
Speed capture Speed
Torque rise rate
Current / torque
① ② ③ ④
Description:
① Excitation / DC lock / speed capture / bias torque output time ③ DC lock parking
②Zero speed lock / DC lock transition time ④ Current release delay
-147-
System Adjustments
Parking contactor arc

Default
value
The time to release the operation contactor
CONTACTOR when the vehicle is delayed to reduce the
1. 0～65535 0
DELAY probability of stopping
Guidance
 Arc is due to electromagnet energy storage inductor Inductance coil and power supply voltage
superimposed on the contacts caused by the release of energy contacts; therefore, by adjusting the
operating contactor release delay to solve the arc problem .
Acceleration curve too slow / too fast

Default
value
Curve start acceleration point of inflection
START ACC
1. control parameters 100～1000 300
JERK
Unit:mm/s3 Reference Value:NA
ACCELERATI Acceleration during curve acceleration
2. 100～1000 500
ON Unit:mm/s2 Reference Value:NA
Acceleration curve at the end of the curve
END ACC
3. control parameters 100～1000 400
JERK
Unit:mm/s3 Reference Value:NA
Guidance
 The elevator accelerates and decelerates through the curve S-curve, which can reduce the impact of
the elevator when starting or stopping. Please adjust elevator starting or stopping S character
according to need and under the condition of meeting national standard.
V END ACC JERK
ACCELERATION
System Adjustments
START ACC JERK
Deceleration section curve too slow / too fast

Default
value
Curve start deceleration point of inflection
START DEC control parameters
1. 00～1000 400
JERK Unit: mm/s3 Reference
Value:NA
2. DECELERATION Acceleration during curve acceleration 00～1000 500
-148-
System Adjustments
Default
value
Unit:mm/s2 Reference
Value:NA
Acceleration curve at the end of the curve
control parameters
3. END DEC JERK 00～1000 100
Unit:mm/s3 Reference
Value:NA
Guidance
 The elevator accelerates and decelerates through the curve S-curve, which can reduce the impact of
the elevator when starting or stopping. Please adjust elevator starting or stopping S character
according to need and under the condition of meeting national standard.
V START DEC JERK
DECELERATION
END DEC JERK
5.12. Level deviation adjustment

Default
value
Set the level where you need to adjust the
1～[The total
1. FLOOR level of the floor 1
floor]
After the elevator is parked upside down, the
height difference between the car and the
2. UP LEVEL 0～400 200
ridge can be set as follows
Unit:mm Reference Value:NA
System Adjustments
Guidance
Door zone board
When the elevator car stops upward, when the
car is higher than the ridge position XX mm, set
the offset value of the upper leveling floor of Door sensor switch
the corresponding floor minus XX mm and

repeat the high speed running to check whether
the leveling accuracy meets the requirements.
Setting method:
1） Select the corresponding floor;
2） Set the upper deviation adjustment
When the elevator goes
parameter value - XX mm up, the car is higher than
the ridge X mm {
Ridge
-149-
System Adjustments
Default
value
Door zone board
When the elevator car stops upward, when the
car is lower than the ridge position XX
millimeters, increase the offset value of the
upper leveling floor of the corresponding floor
Door sensor switch
by XX millimeters, and repeat the high speed
train operation to check if the leveling accuracy
meets the requirements.
Setting method:
1） Select the corresponding floor; When the elevator goes
up, the car is lower than
2） Set the upper deviation adjustment the ridge X mm
parameter value + XX mm {
Ridge
Default
value
After the elevator is stopped downwards, the
height difference between the car and the
1. DN LEVEL 0～400 200
ridge can be set as follows
Unit:mm Reference Value:NA
Guidance
Door zone board
When the elevator car stops downwards, when
the car is higher than the ridge position XX
Door sensor switch
mm, set the deviation value of the leveling floor
of the corresponding floor minus XX mm and
repeat the high speed operation to check
whether the leveling accuracy meets the
requirements.
Setting method: When the elevator
1） Select the corresponding floor; stops downwards, the
car is higher than the
2） Set the downlink deviation adjustment ridge X mm {
parameter value - XX mm
Ridge
System Adjustments
Door zone board

When the elevator car stops downwards, when
the car is lower than the ridge position XX
millimeters, set the deviation floor value of the
leveling floor in the corresponding floor by XX
Door sensor switch
millimeters, and repeat the high speed
operation operation to check whether the
leveling accuracy meets the requirements.
Setting method: When the elevator
1） Select the corresponding floor; stops downwards, the
car is lower than the
2） Set the downlink deviation adjustment ridge X mm
parameter value + XX mm {
Ridge
Caution
 After determining the position of the car during leveling adjustment, do single floor and
-150-
System Adjustments
Default
value
multi-floor run to monitor the leveling accuracy of the car and the landing.
 For elevator self-leveling, re-leveling, UPS operation, and parking, the phenomenon of uneven
floor is related to the corresponding running speed. To solve the problem, reduce the
corresponding speed.
5.13. Protection parameter adjustment

Drive protection
Default
value
Motor overload action selection
0: not protected;
1: Free coasting stops;
OVERLOAD 2: deceleration stops;
1. 0 to 4 1
PROT.EN 3: sudden deceleration stops;
4: Only warning.
Unit: NA Reference value:
NA
Set the detection time of the motor 150%
OVERLOAD
2. overload protection 0.1 to 10.0 0.3
PROT.TI
Unit: min Reference value: NA
Drive over torque action selection
0: not protected;
OVER 2: deceleration stops;
3. 0 to 4 1
TORQUE EN 3: sudden deceleration stops;
4: Only warning.
NA
Set the maximum torque of the drive output.
When this value is exceeded, the torque fault
OVER
4. will be reterminaled. 0.0 to 500.0 150.0
TORQ.VALUE
Unit: N•M Reference value:
NA
Set the action time of over-torque protection
5.
OVER
Unit: s Reference value: 0.1 to 25.0 5.0 System Adjustments
TORQ.TIME
NA
The maximum torque of the motor in the
DRAG drag operation of the elevator
6. 0.0 to 500.0 150.0
TORQ.MAX Unit: N•M Reference value:
NA
The maximum torque of the motor in the
BRAKE braking operation of the elevator
7. 0.0 to 500.0 150.0
TORQ.MAX Unit: N•M Reference value:
NA
The rate at which the torque limit changes is
described by the time required from 0 to
TORQUE LIM
8. 100%. 0.01~2.50 0.10
TIME
Unit: s Reference value:
NA
9. ENCODER Set whether the encoder disconnection 0~1 1
-151-
System Adjustments
Default
value
PROT.EN protection function is valid
0: Disability;
1: Enable.
NA
Set the encoder phase error protection
function is valid
PHASH 0: Disability;
10. 0~1 0
PROT.EN 1: Enable.
NA
Set whether Z phase detection is valid
0: Disability;
Z PHASE
11. 1: Enable. 0~1 0
PROT.EN
NA
Set the elevator protection mode after
detecting the Z phase error
0: not protected;
Z PHASE
12. 2: deceleration stops; 0 to 4 0
ERROR
3: sudden deceleration stops;
4: Only warning.
NA
Set the threshold of the Z phase pulse error
ZPHASE ERR
13. Unit: NA Reference value: 0.1 to 25.0 0.5
VALUE
NA
Set the number of consecutive errors of the Z
ZPHASE ERR phase pulse
14. 1 to 100 3
TIMES Unit: NA Reference value:
NA
Drive input phase loss protection
0: not protected;
IN.PHASE 2: deceleration stops;
System Adjustments
15. 0 to 4 1
PROT.EN 3: sudden deceleration stops;
4: Only warning.
NA
Set the threshold for input phase loss
IN.PHASE protection voltage
16. 1 to 100 20
VALUE Unit: V Reference value:
NA
Set whether the drive output phase loss
protection function is valid
OUTPHASE 0: Disability;
17. 0~1 1
PROT.EN 1: Enable.
NA
BF OPEN Set whether the drive output phase loss
18. 0~1 0
PHASE EN protection function is effective before
-152-
System Adjustments
Default
value
opening the brake
0: Disability;
1: Enable.
NA
Set whether the drive output earth leakage
protection function is valid
LEAK 0: Disability;
19. 0~1 1
CURRENT EN 1: Enable.
NA
Action selection for driving the heat sink to
overheat
0: not protected;
20. HOT PROT.EN 2: deceleration stops; 0 to 4 1
4: Only warning.
NA
Set the temperature to drive the heat sink
HOT overheat protection
21. 50～120 80
PROT.TEMP Unit: °C Reference value:
80
Set the detection time of the drive heat sink
HOT overheat protection
22. 1 to 250 3
PROT.TIME Unit: s Reference value:
NA
Set the temperature threshold for the fan to
FAN STOP turn off after the drive stops running
23. 20～100 45
TEMP Unit: °C Reference value:
45
Stall & Overspeed Protection
Default
value
Elevator stall action selection System Adjustments
0: not protected;
LOSE SPEED
1 2: deceleration stops; 0 to 4 1
EN
4: Only warning.
Unit: NA Reference value: NA
The feedback speed is less than the threshold
LOSE SPEED
2 of the command speed percentage 1 to 50 10
VALUE
unit:% Reference value: NA
LOSE SPEED Set the duration of the stall operation
3 0.01 to 25.0 0.50
TIMES Unit: s Reference value: NA
Elevator speeding action selection
OVER SPEED 0: not protected;
4 0 to 4 1
EN 1: Free coasting stops;
2: deceleration stops;
-153-
System Adjustments
Default
value
4: Only warning.
The feedback speed is greater than the
OVER SPEED
5 threshold of the command speed percentage 1~120 105
VALUE
OVER SPEED Set the duration of the overspeed status
6 0.01 to 25.0 0.10
TIME Unit: s Reference value: NA
Percentage of the corresponding speedrelative
TERMIN.SPD
7 to the terminal 0～65535 135
PROT.
Elevator operation protection
Default
value
Protection time for elevator high speed,
re-leveling or back-to-bottom operation.
RUN
1 Leveling protection time = running 0 to 500 45
PROT.TIME
protection time setting value *5.
Unit: s Reference value: NA
Indication
 The runtime protection parameters are limited to the elevator high speed operation, the fault return
level operation, and the elevator back to the bottom run time.
 The running time protection in the high speed operation is judged according to the "running
timeout condition".
The protection time of the elevator running
UPS RUN
2 on the UPS leveling layer 0 to 500 100
PROTECT
Indication
UPS run timeout protection is an independent constraint that is not limited to other operational
timings.
Elevator running timeout mode selection
RUNTIME 0: The two-door interval runs out of time;
3 0~1 0
OUT TYPE 1: The whole process runs timeout.
System Adjustments

Indication
This condition applies only to the high speed train running sequence.
Selection of parking mode when the elevator
is running
FAULT STOP
4 0: Stop immediately; 0~1 0
TYPE
1: Slowly decelerate to stop.
Indication
 Immediate parking definition: After the control system detects a heavy fault, it will immediately
cancel the brake, run the contactor output signal, stop the elevator brake, and prohibit the elevator
from running.
 Deceleration stop definition: After the control system detects the fault, the emergency
-154-
System Adjustments
Default
value
deceleration curve is used to stop the impact caused by the elevator immediately stopping.
Reset mode selection for running timeout
failure
FAULT37
5 0: manual reset; 0~1 0
RESET
1: Automatic reset.
Indication
 Manual reset definition: reset mode by service switch, emergency electric switch or system
power-off operation.
 Automatic reset definition: The reset mode of the control system self-reset operation.
Door zone signal fault handling
FAULT40 0: back to the bottom correction;
6 0~1 0
RESET 1: Run immediately.
Indication
 Door zone signal fault definition: refers to the fault caused by the controller detecting the sticking
of the signal signal in the door zone. The fault code is 40#.
Time after the main unit thermal protection
HOT RESET switch is reset to the normal operation of the
7 0～5000 0
TIME elevator
5.14. Standard function setting

Floor display settings
Default
value
Select the need to set the display floor 1～[The total
1. FLOOR 1
Unit:NA Reference Value:NA floor]
Set the floor to display the output characters
2. DISPLAY 0～9999 NA
System Adjustments
Guidance
Floor display setting method:
1） Select the floor you want to set.
2） Set the corresponding character according to the requirement; the character set must be the content
shown in the following table, otherwise it can not be set.
3） Example 1: When the required floor is displayed as “1”, the corresponding floor display is set to
“1617”;
4） Example 2: When the required floor is displayed as “10”, the corresponding floor display is set to
“1716”;
Setting
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
value
Display
! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
code
Setting 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
-155-
System Adjustments
Default
value
value
Display
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
code
Setting
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
value
Display
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
code
Setting
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
value
Display
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
code
Setting
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
value
Display
` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
code
Setting
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
value
Display
p q r s t u v w x y z
code
Setting
value 6162 6465 6768 7071 7374 7677 7980 8283 8586 8889
Display
10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A 19A
code
Setting
value 6163 6466 6769 7072 7375 7678 7981 8284 8587 8890
Display
10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 19B
code
Door layout configuration
Default
value
Set the front door layout configuration, set the
FRONT 1～[The total Can open
1. way to see below
DOOR floor] the door
Guidance
Front door layout configuration method:
1） Mobile phone or PC software can directly click the corresponding floor number to select "can open
System Adjustments
the door", "can not open the door."

2） Refer to the following instructions when using the Handheld Setup:
a. Open the "front door layout settings" menu, you can see the following interface: The number of
floors displayed is the same as the total floor.
D1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Digital anti-black D1 row1~10 floor configuration

said
D11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 D11 row11~20 floor configuration
This floor of door
layout effective D21 row21~30 floor configuration
D21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
D31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 D31 row 31~40 floor configuration

The number is
highlighted D41 row 41~50 floor configuration
D41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
This floor door D51 row 51~60 floor configuration
D51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 layout is off D61 row 61~64 floor configuration
-156-
System Adjustments
Default
value
D61 1 2 3 4
b. Select the desired floor by moving the cursor.

c. Use the combination of keys:CTRL+ ↑can set the corresponding floor to "open the door"
function; use the CTRL+↓combination of buttons to set the corresponding floor is "can not open
the door" function.
Set the rear door layout configuration, set the Do not
1～[The total
2. REAR DOOR way to see below open the
floor] door
Set through the door layout configuration, set Do not
THROUGH 1～[The total
3. the way to see below open the
DOOR floor]
Unit:NA Reference Value:NA door
Guidance
 Back-door layout configuration, through-door layout configuration method and front-door layout
configuration method is consistent, please refer to the front door layout configuration method.
Lock elevator function configuration

Default
value
Elevator lock after the entry into force of the
0～[The total
1. LK FLOOR target floor 1
floor]
Set the car shutdown switch installation
location floor
Front door car shutdown switch configuration
LK SWITCH
2. parameters: 1 ~ 64; 0～65535 1
FLOOR
Front door car shutdown switch configuration
parameters: 65 ~ 65535;
Set the elevator elevator switch electrical
properties configuration
LK SWITCH
3. 0: normally open 0～1 0
LOGIC
1: normally closed
Set the timing car shutdown & timing and date System Adjustments
4. Time LK NA NA
Guidance
 When configuring the car shutdown service function, set the elevator ladder base station floor, car
shutdown configuration floor, and the electrical properties of the car shutdown switch; otherwise,
the car shutdown service function can not be enabled.
 When the car shutdown switch is configured on the floor, confirm the switch installation position
(front hall door controller or rear hall door controller);
a) When the installation position is the front door, please configure the car shutdown switch floor
according to "installation floor address" (range 1 ~ 65535);
b) When the installation location is the back door, please configure the car shutdown switch floor
according to the format of "64 + installation floor address".
 Car shutdown switch input point definition:
a) Front hall door controller input signal point;
b) Rear hall door controller input signal point;
-157-
System Adjustments
Default
value
c) The main controller input signal point.
 Each elevator only supports the installation of one lock switch.
 Closed car shutdown service function:
a) Car shutdown floor = 0;
b) Car shutdown Switch Configuration Floor = 0.
 When configuring the car shutdown service function, set the elevator ladder base station floor, car
shutdown configuration floor, and the electrical properties of the car shutdown switch; otherwise,
the car shutdown service function can not be enabled.
 When the car shutdown switch is configured on the floor, confirm the switch installation position
c) When the installation position is the front door, please configure the car shutdown switch floor
according to "installation floor address" (range 1 ~ 65535);
d) When the installation location is the back door, please configure the car shutdown switch floor
 Car shutdown switch input point definition:
d) Front hall door controller input signal point;
e) Rear hall door controller input signal point;
f) The main controller input signal point.
 Each elevator only supports the installation of one lock switch.
 Closed car shutdown service function:
c) Car shutdown floor = 0;
d) Car shutdown Switch Configuration Floor = 0.
Fire function configuration

Default
value
Set the fire mode
0: domestic model;
FR MODE 1: Hong Kong model;
1. 0～65535 0
TYPE 2: British model;
Other values: No definition at this time.
Set the destination floor for the first
1st FR BASE 1～[The total
System Adjustments
2. firefighting landing 1
FL. floor]
Set the first fire switch installation location
3. 1st FR SW. FL. floor 1～65535 1
Set the first fire switch electrical properties
configuration
1st FR SW.
4. 0: normally open 0～1 0
LOGIC
1: normally closed
2nd FR BASE Set the second fire landing destination floor
5. 0～65535 0
FL. Unit:NA Reference Value:NA
Elevator forced to firefighters automatically
FR MAN SER.
6. enter the state of firefighters delay time. 0～5000 5
DELAY
Unit:s Reference Value:NA
FR RTN Fire return output selection
7. 0～65535 1
OUTPUT EN 0: fire after the pressure drop output;
-158-
System Adjustments
Default
value
1: After the fire was forced down the fire
station base output;
Guidance
 When you enable the fire service function, please select the fire service mode according to your
needs.
 When configuring the fire protection function, you must set the floor parameters of the fire
protection base station and the fire protection switch at the same time.
 When configuring the first floor of the fire-fighting switch, confirm the switch installation position
a) When the installation location is the front door, please press "Installation Floor Address" to
configure the fire switch floor (range 1 ~ 65535);
b) When the installation location is the back door, the fire switch floor should be configured
 Fire switch input point definition:
a) Front hall door controller input signal point;
b) Rear hall door controller input signal point;
c) The main controller input signal point.
 Each elevator only supports installing a first fire switch.
 The second fire station configuration function is only applicable to "British Fire Mode".
 Turn off the fire service function configuration:
a) Firebase = 0:
b) Fire switch configuration floor = 0;
Parking Operation
Default
value
Elevator automatically return to the base
0～[The total
1. PARK FLOOR station floor when idle 1
floor]
Elevator idle time to return to the base station
2. PARK DELAY 0～5000 400
Unit:s Reference Value:NA System Adjustments
Return to the base station elevator door open
options
0: Do not open the door;
PARK DOOR 1: automatically open the door 1 times;
3. 0～65535 0
OPEN 2: automatically open the door and keep the
door open;
Guidance
 Turn off homing function: Homing = 0, Homing time = 0.
Energy Saving Fan and Light Shutoff

Default
value
-159-
System Adjustments
Default
value
Elevator idle time to enter the energy-saving
1. ENERGY
state 0～65535 600
SAVING
Unit:s Reference Value:NA
Guidance
 • Idle mode requirements: a.) Time, b.) Door Lock connected
 • Idle saving time = 0: Idle mode disabled
Arrival Chimes
Default
value
After the arrival of the elevator, the station
RING HOLD
1. bell output hold time. 0～5000 1500
TIME
Unit:ms Reference Value:NA
Set a certain period of time to open and stop
RING TIMER
2. using ringtones NA NA
SER.
Guidance
 This function is to configure the elevator deceleration into the door area, the station bell output
signal hold time, according to the needs of self-adjustment.
Duplex and Group Control

Default
value
Set the identification number of the current
SYSTEM elevator in the whole system when duplex or
1. 0～8 0
GROUP NO. group control.
Floor difference between the highest floor and
UP OFFSET
2. the lowest floor of the floor. 0～64 0
System Adjustments
FLOOR
Difference between the basement floor and the
DN OFFSET
3. floor below the base station floor. 0～64 0
FLOOR
In duplex, the main and auxiliary elevator
open the way when calling out.
0: main and auxiliary elevator at the same time
DOOR OPEN switch;
4. 0～65535 1
CONFIG 1: main elevator open the door;
2: Deputy elevator open the door;
The time when the communication between
COMM the main control board and other terminals is
5. 0～65535 0
FAULT TIME interrupted
Unit:ms Reference Value:NA
-160-
System Adjustments
Default
value
Guidance
 System group number configuration method:
0：Simplex elevator configuration
1：Duplex main elevator configuration
2：Duplex auxiliary elevator configuration
 Duplex floor bias configuration and setting method:
Note: Car A is the duplex main elevator and Car B is the duplex auxiliary elevator; The elevator
with the most floors must be configured as the main elevator.
Configuration method 1 Configuration method 2
Car A Car B
Configuration method 3 Configuration method 4
Car A Car B
Car A Car A
Floor 5 Floor 5 Floor 4 Floor 4

Floor 5 Car B Floor 4 Car B Floor 4


▲
▲
▲
▲
Floor 2 Floor 2 Lobby Lobby

▲
▲
▲
▲ ▲
▲
Floor 2 Floor 2 Lobby Lobby
▲
▲
▲ ▲
▲ ▲
Lobby Lobby Parking 1

Lobby Lobby Parking 1
Car A Upper bias floor：0 Car A Upper bias floor：0
Car A Lower bias floor：0 Car A Lower bias floor：0 Car A Upper bias floor：0 Car A Upper bias floor：0
Car B Lower bias floor：0 Car B Upper bias floor：0 Car A Lower bias floor：0 Car A Lower bias floor：0
Car B Lower bias floor：0 Car B Lower bias floor：1 Car B Upper bias floor：0 Car B Upper bias floor：0
Car B Lower bias floor：0 Car B Lower bias floor：1
5.15. Optional function adjustments

INSPECT COMFOR
Default
value
INSP.RUN 1st Elevator inspection operation speed
1. 0～ 630 200
SPD Unit: mm/s Reference value: NA
Starting speed of elevator inspection
INSP.RUN 2nd
2. operation 0 to 200 100
SPD
Unit: mm/s Reference value: NA
EMERGENCY Elevator emergency electric speed
3. 0 to 30 0 150
System Adjustments
SPD Unit: mm/s Reference value: NA
Maintenance curve starting acceleration knee
INSP.ACC.JE
4. control parameter 100~1000 300
RK
Unit: mm/s3 Reference value: NA
Acceleration during linear acceleration of
5. INSP.ACC maintenance curve 100~1000 300
Maintenance curve ends acceleration knee
INSP.DEC.JER
6. control parameters 1 to 10000 2000
K
Acceleration during linear deceleration of
7. INSP.DEC maintenance curve 1 to 10000 2000
Time from speed cancellation to brake
INSP.STOP
8. revocation in maintenance operation 0～5000 1000
DELAY
Unit: ms Reference value: NA
-161-
System Adjustments
Default
value
Indication
 The maintenance parking delay is used to set the parking mode during inspection operation: zero
speed parking or immediate parking.
 >300: Zero speed parking, after the elevator zero speed, press the brake release delay to cancel
the brake output signal.
 ≤300: Stop immediately, and the speed signal and the brake output signal are simultaneously
cancelled.
Overhaul Overhaul
Inspection acceleration
Inspection and
deceleration
Overhaul Overhaul
Inspection
acceleration Overhaul
Overhaul Maintenance Maintenance operation
operation first speed second speed
LEVELING FUN SET

Default
value
Set the maximum running speed when
LEVELING
1. returning to the leveling layer. 0 to 200 100
SPD
Unit: mm/s Reference value: 100
Indication
 This function can be configured to stop the elevator when the elevator is inspectioned or the fault is
stopped in the non-door zone.
note
 The running speed of the elevator leveling layer is recommended not to exceed 200mm/s,otherwise
the flat layer deviation will be large when the leveling layer is parked.
System Adjustments
UPS FUN SET

Default
value
Select whether to enable the UPS running
function.
0: Disability;
1. UPS RUN EN 0~1 0
1: Enable.
unit: Reference value:
NA
Set the speed at which the UPS is running.
UPS RUN
2. Unit: mm/s Reference value: 0 to 200 100
SPEED
100
The parking mode of the elevator when the
UPS RUN UPS is running.
3. 0~1 0
MODE 0: Stop immediately;
1: Stop at the set speed.
-162-
System Adjustments
Default
value
NA
Indication
 The UPS running speed needs to be set with reference to the UPS capacity. If the running speed is
set too large, it will lead to voltage saturation and stall failure.
RELEVELING
Default
value
Set the time to meet the conditions for
opening the door in advance to the time of
PREOPEN
1. opening the door in advance. 0 to 10000 0
DELAY
Unit: ms Reference value:
NA
Set the speed at which to re-level.
RELEVEL
2. Unit: mm/s Reference value: 0 to 300 15
SPEED
NA
Set the time to perform the re-leveling
RELEVEL sequence.
3. 0 to 50 30
TIME Unit: s Reference value:
NA
The low speed signal is output after the speed
LOW SPEED is lower than the set value.
4. 0～65535 500
VALUE Unit: mm/s Reference value:
NA
Indication
 Open the door and leveling function configuration:
Re-leveling running time=0: invalid
The re-leveling running time ≠0: is valid, and the set value is the re-leveling running time, and
the system reterminals the 85# fault when the re-leveling operation sequence is not executed
within this time.
note
System Adjustments
 According to GB 7588, the re-leveling speed is not more than 0.3m/s.
UCMP FUN SET

Default
value
Select whether to enable UCMP function
detection.
UCMP
1. 0: Disability; 0~1 1
ENABLE
1: Enable.
SHIELD Select the 25# fault monitoring function in the
ER25EN UCMP operation.
1: Enable.
-163-
System Adjustments
Default
value
1: Enable.
1: Enable.
Select the 28# fault monitoring function in the
UCMP operation.
SHIELD
ER28EN
1: Enable.
ER25 Set the time for detecting 25# fault duration
6. 0～65535 0
DECTTIME Unit: ms Reference value: NA
ER26 Set the time for detecting 26# fault duration
7. 0～65535 0
DECTTIME Unit: ms Reference value: NA
Indication
 UCMP function to meet EN81- 20
 UCMP solutions include: inspection devices, control systems and stop components .
note
K-MC1000 main chip A1.4 software version and above, "Shield 25#, 26#, 27#, 28# fault function
selection" menu is invalid, the meaning of the fault is also changed (see "Chapter 8 Adjustments" for
details)
DOOR CONTROL
Default
value
Double door car operating panel
System Adjustments
configuration
0: two car boards;
1. COP CONFIG 0～65535 0
1: a car board;
Other values: No definition yet.
Choose according to the type of door
machine:
0: no torque retention function after the
switch door is in place;
1: Maintain torque output after closing the
DOOR
2. door; 0 to 3 0
DRIVE TYPE
2: Maintain torque output after opening the
door;
3: The torque output is maintained after the
switch door is in place.
-164-
System Adjustments
Default
value
Hand-drawn door function configuration
0: Disability;
2: Enable; [Elevator running condition again:
detecting that the door lock signal is
interrupted once, the elevator can run again]
HAND DOOR
3. 6: Enable; [Elevator re-running condition: the 0～65535 0
TYPE
elevator can be operated again after detecting
that the door lock signal is interrupted once
or after a delay of 5 seconds]
Set the conditions for the double door closing
output
0: When the door lock is unreachable, the
double doors output the door together;
DUALDOOR
4. 1: After the door is closed, the corresponding 0～65535 0
CTRL
closing command is terminated;
NA
Turn off the double door switch function
when configuring a car controller in a
FRDOOR two-door layout
5. 0～65535 0
SWITCH 0: Disability;
1: enable
The shield configuration automatic door, the
door closed limitsignal monitoring function
DOOR
CLOSE EN
1: Enable.
The shield configuration automatic door, the
door open limit signal monitoring function
DOOR OPEN
EN
1: Enable.
Indication System Adjustments
 When hand door configuration, the control system does not detect the closed door open
limitsignal.
ANTI RIOT FUN

Default
value
Set anti-scrambling function
0: Disability;
≠0: Enable, the set value is the number of
ANTITRICK
1. valid registrations of the car command, and 0～65535 0
EN
the command system that exceeds the set
value is not recognized.
2. DBLECLICK Turn off the car command button and 0～65535 0
-165-
System Adjustments
Default
value
CANCEL double-click the killfunction
0: Disability;
1: enable
Whether the registration instruction in the car
is cancelledafter the elevator runs to the
REVERSE terminal
3. 0～65535 0
CANCEL 0: the number;
1: keep the registration instruction;
Light curtain forcible door closing operation
is detected by the light curtain system refers
signal continues operation, the forced door
FORCE closing signal output function.
4. 0～65535 0
CLOSE EN <10, forced closing is invalid;
≥10, forced output to close the door after the
set time.
Indication
Double-click the cancel function : The control system detects the edge jump of the same floor
command button twice in 1.2 seconds, and double-clicks the cancel function to be effective.
BARTHQUAKE FUN
Default
value
After the controller's seismic outputpoint is
BARTHQUAKE activated , the elevator opens the door to
1. 0～65535 0
FUN maintain the time.
NUDGING FUN
Default
value
System Adjustments
Set the stimuli to close the function selection.

Strong 0: Disability;
1. 0～65535 0
slamming 1: enable
Strong A light curtain for detecting an operation
2. slamming duration time 0～65535 180
detection time Unit: s Reference value: NA
Indication
 Strong excitation closing functions: automatic leveling operation, continuous operation of the
light curtain open operation exceeds 180S, the system performs a strong shock closed while the
car with the buzzer.
ENHANCE FUN
Default
value
-166-
System Adjustments
Default
value
Set the direction of the pulse count
0: positive count;
ENCODER
1. 1: reverse counting; 0～65535 0
DIR.
When the inspection operation is selected,
the elevator running function is prohibited
after thelow speed reduction operation .
SLOWDOWN
2. 0: Disability 0～65535 0
PROT.
1: enable
Run interrupt door lock to close the door
DOORLK ON
3. output time 0～65535 4
CLSDEY
Set the way to brake the brake
0: The time output KZD3 of the delay [brake
switching delay] after the elevator starts
BRAKE output KZD;
4. 0~1 0
TURN TYPE 1: When the elevator starts and outputs KZD
and KZD3, the time delay [Brake switching
delay] is disconnected from KZD3.
Floor pulse correction method when the door
zone signal is detected during elevator
operation
PG CNT 0: Correction throughout
5. 0～65535 0
CORRECT 1: not corrected after deceleration
2: The whole process is not corrected
Set the system to detect the encoderless pulse
PG FB.DECT
6. feedback signal determination time 0～65535 5000
DEALY
Set the pulse value when the elevator is
stationary
7.
STOP PLUSE
0: indicates 5 pulse ranges; 0～65535 0 System Adjustments
CNT
N: represents N + 5 pulse ranges.
After setting back terminalsplit mode
FL,ERR0R 0: return to the bottom station calibration ;
8. 0~1 0
CORRECT 1: Near- return station calibration.
Set 54# brake trip switch action timeout fault
FAULT54
9. detection time 0～65535 0
DECTTIME
Choose to press and hold the command
button in this layer to open the door.
CARCALL 0: Disability;
10. 0～65535 0
OPENDOOR 1: enable
-167-
System Adjustments
Default
value
Choose to press and hold the command
button in this layer to open the door.
Car call buzzer 0: Disability;
11. 0～65535 0
selection 1: enable
Set wire rope slip threshold monitoring
Wire rope slip 0: Disability
12. XX: Enable 0～65535 0
detection
Unit: mm Reference value: NA
Enter the “Manual Brake Force Detection”
menu through the operator and press the
Braking force Enter key to automatically execute the 150%
13. NA NA
detection
torque brake force detection.
Enter the “slip function test” menu through
the operator and press the enter key
Slip function
14. toautomatically enter the torque boost NA NA
test
operation.
When the drive current monitoring function
is selected, the L6-06 parameter value is
modified by the “Alternate Multi-function
Current
Menu”.
15. monitoring NA 0
0: Disability
FUN
1: enable
note
 Please configure the system enhancement function under the guidance of a professional,
otherwise it will cause system failure.
 Manual brake force detection conditions: the machine room maintenance status, the safety door
lock is turned on, the car is in the non-top floor position, and the system is in a fault-free
operation.
System Adjustments
 Slip function test conditions: the machine room maintenance status, the safety door lock is turned
on, and the system is in a faultless operation.
MBC INPUT
Default
value
Select the corresponding input point in the
1. PORT motherboard: P1~P24 P1～P24 NA
Set the value of the corresponding input
point. The different values correspond to
2. FUN the respective functions, as shown in the 0～99 NA
table below.
Indication
-168-
System Adjustments
Default
value
Set the multi-function definition of each low-voltage input point, please configure it according to the
requirements as shown in the following table:
Multi-function definition
Parameter Parameter
Function Function
Value. Value.
Strong signal reduction at low
0 Reserved 1
speed
Medium-speed strong reduction
2 Strong signal at low speed 3
signal
Strong signal reduction at high
4 Medium speed up signal 5
speed
6 High-speed signal 7 Lower limit signal
8 Upper limit signal 9 Door signal
10 Home area signal 11 Lower door signal
14 Motor thermal protectionsignal 15 Brake trip switch signal 1
Running contactor monitoring
16 17 Brake contactor monitoring signal
signal
18 Emergency electric 19 Inspection signal
20 Inspection 21 Maintenance down
Low voltage door lock monitoring Low voltage safety monitoring
22 23
signal signal
Front door safety door opening
24 Power failure detection signal 25
monitor signal
Rear door safety door opening
26 27 Centralized fire signal
monitor signal
28 Special light earthquake 29 Light earthquake
30 Overload input 31 Full load input
32 Second fire input 33 Lock car signal
34 External drive enable signal 35 UCMP fault reset signal
Asynchronous UCMP speed
37 External UCMP_Test switch 38
limiter feedback
Asynchronous UCMP contactor
39
feedback
42 Pit inspection signal System Adjustments
43 Bottom pit repair repair signal 46 Heartbeat feedback signal
47 Brake stroke switch signal 2 51 Manual release detection
52 Bypass signal 60 Door lock monitoring signal
61 Front door lock monitor signal 62 Safety monitoring signal
63 Rear door lock monitoring signal
note
 Please note the definition of other input points in the input point signal customization, so as not to
cause the signal point to be repeatedly defined; otherwise, the system reterminals 1# fault, which
causes the system to fail to operate normally. Please refer to the fault diagnosis for details.
 After the input point is redefined, the corresponding logic settings (normally open / normally
closed) are also valid.
 For the K-MC1000 main chip A1.4 software version and above, the input point definitions 22
and 23 are invalid.
-169-
System Adjustments
Factory Configuration
Input Set Input Set
Function definition Function definition
signal value signal value
P1 Home area signal 10 P2 Door signal 9
Strong signal reduction at
P3 Lower door signal 11 P4 1
low speed
P5 Strong signal at low speed 2 P6 Lower limit signal 7
Bottom pit repair repair
P7 Upper limit signal 8 P8 43
signal
Running contactor
P9 Reserved 0 P10 16
monitoring signal
Brake contactor monitoring Brake stroke switch
P11 17 P12 15
signal monitoring signal
Motor thermal
P13 14 P14 Emergency electric 18
protectionsignal
P15 Inspection signal 19 P16 Inspection 20
twenty
P17 Maintenance down P18 Reserved 0
one
Front door safety door Power failure detection twenty
P19 25 P20
opening monitor signal signal four
Brake stroke switch signal
P21 Centralized fire signal 27 P22 47
2
P23 Bypass signal 52 P24 Pit inspection signal 42
MBC OUTPUT
Default
value
Select the corresponding output point in the
1. PORT motherboard T1～T7 NA
Set the value of the corresponding output
point. The different values correspond to
2. FUN the respective functions, as shown in the 0～99 NA
table below.
System Adjustments
Indication
Set the above parameters to realize the multi-function definition of each output point. Please set
according to the requirements according to the following table.
Parameter Parameter
Function Function
Value. Value.
0 Reserved 1 Star contactor output
2 Open the door and level the output 3 Fire return output
4 Seismic output 5 Energy saving output
6 Front door opening output 7 Front door closing output
8 Rear door opening output 9 Rear door closing output
10 Uplink signal 11 Downstream signal
44 UPS feedback output 47 Block the slip output
-170-
System Adjustments
Parameter Parameter
Function Function
Value. Value.
52 Low speed signal output 54 Brake contactor output
55 Brake forced contactor output 56 Drive input power control signal
57 Running contactor output 58 Emergency electric output
note
 When defining a multi-function output, please note that the common side of the replacement
point must be changed accordingly.
 Please pay attention to the definition of other output points in the output point signal
customization, so as to avoid the repeated definition of the signal point; otherwise, the system
reterminals 2# fault, which causes the system to fail to operate normally. For details, please refer
toChapter 8 Fault Diagnosis .
Output Set Output Set
T1 Running contactor output 57 T2 Brake contactor output 54
T3 Emergency electric output 58 T4 Fire return output 3
Open the door and level the
T5 2 T6 Low speed signal output 52
output
T7 UPS feedback output 44
CTC INPUT
Default
value
Select the corresponding input point in the
1. PORT car top panel: P1~P15 P1～P16 NA
Set the value of the corresponding input
point. The different values correspond to the
2. FUN respective functions, as shown in the table 0～99 NA
below.
Indication
System Adjustments
Set the multi-function definition of each low-voltage input point, please configure it according to the
requirements as shown in the following table:
Parameter Parameter
Function Function
Value. Value.
0 Reserved 1 ATT
2 Go straight 3 Overload signal
4 Front door opens in place 5 Front door closed in place
6 Front door opening button 7 Front door closing button
8 Front door light curtain 9 Light load signal
-171-
System Adjustments
Parameter Parameter
Function Function
Value. Value.
10 Full load signal 11 Front door safety touch panel
12 Front and rear door conversion 13 Operate independently
15 Fireman switch 20 The back door opens in place
21 The back door is closed 22 Back door opening button
23 Rear door closing button 24 Back door light curtain
27 Rear door safety touch panel 33 Half load signal
34 Door open delay button 35 Car inspection
36 Car maintenance down 39 lighting switch
40 Fan switch 42 Driver up operation button
43 Driver down operation button 46 IC card enable
Note
 Please pay attention to the definition of other input points in the input point signal customization,
so as not to cause the input point definition to be repeated; otherwise, the system reterminals 7#
fault, which causes the system to fail to operate normally. Please refer to the fault diagnosis for
details .
 After the input point is redefined, the corresponding logic settings (normally open / normally
closed) are also valid.
CCB INPUT
Default
value
Select the corresponding output point in the
1 PORT car top plate T3~T7 NA
Set the value of the corresponding output
point. The different values correspond to the
2 FUN respective functions, as shown in the table 0～99 NA
below.
System Adjustments
Indication
Set the above parameters to realize the multi-function definition of each output point. Please set
according to the requirements according to the following table.
Parameter Parameter
Function Function
Value. Value.
0 Reserved 8 Rear door opening output
9 Rear door closing output 17 To station ring output
Bypass sound and light alarm
46 48 Up to station ring output
output
49 Downstream to station ringoutput 50 Leveling output
51 Strong slamming output
-172-
System Adjustments
Parameter Parameter
Function Function
Value. Value.
Note
 When defining a multi-function output, please note that the common side of the replacement
point must be changed accordingly.
 Please pay attention to the definition of other output points in the output point signal
customization, so as to avoid the repeated definition of the signal point; otherwise, the system
reterminals 2# fault, which causes the system to fail to operate normally. For details, please refer
toChapter 8 Fault Diagnosis .
Output Set Output Set
T3 Strong slamming output 51 T4 Rear door opening output 8
Bypass sound and light
T5 Rear door closing output 9 T6 46
alarm output
T7 To station ring output 17
5.16. Control system parameters

PASSWORD SET
Default
value
UserPW Set the control system adjustments
permission password
1. 0～999999 0
NA
Indication
 Factory default password: 012345
 If the debug password is forgotten, please contact the factory.
SYS TIME SET System Adjustments
Default
value
SYS TIME Set the control system internal clock Yyyy -MM-
Beijing
1. SET Unit: NA Reference value: NA dd
time
HH-mm- ss
Indication
 Please set the internal clock of the control system accurately, which provides valid information
for system diagnosis.
DEFAULT SET
Default
value
1. MBPARA Restore the factory configuration value of the NA NA
-173-
System Adjustments
Default
value
RESET elevator control part parameters.
INVPARA Restore the factory configuration values of
2. RESET the drive part parameters. NA NA
Motor, encoder, elevator comfort parameters.
ALLPARA All parameters of the recovery unit are
3. NA NA
RESET factory configured values.
Indication
 After performing a factory value of the operating system will automatically imterminal the
default parameter values, please exercise caution.
 When the factory default value is restored, the system will prompt “LOAD...” to display the
digital tube display onboard. , the prompt parameters are loaded; do not power off!
System Adjustments
-174-
System Adjustments
5.17. Elevator acceptance instructions

UCMP Test instructions for K-SF1000
 Functionalities description
The K-SF1000 short door locks circuit during re-leveling with the door opened. When the control
system cannot detect ULM, DZ or DZ, DLM (Door zone signals); the controller immediately drop the
brake and PM1 contactors to stop the elevator operation.
 Test conditions
 The controller has no fault.
 Make sure the car is in the middle floor and inside the door zone.（E0.01>2）
 Make sure the elevator is under normal operation.
 Make sure the car door is closed.
 Test procedure
Step1: Make sure the UCMP test switch (H4.XX= 37)
Step2: Turn on the UCMP test switch. The door lock circuit will open. The display should
show “722”. Check below for display for different conditions.
Step3: Go to parameter F3.08. Set this parameter one of the following settings:
• “1”: Moving the car up on level speed.
• “2”: Moving the car down on level speed.
• “3”: Moving the car up on high speed.
• “4”: Moving the car down on high speed.
Step4: When F3.08 is set with one of the setting mentioned above, the control system will activate
K-SF1000 board to short the door lock circuit and start moving the elevator accordingly.
The LED display will show “Pts”
Step5: As soon as the elevator leaves the door zone, the elevator will stop. The LED display will
alternately display the status "Pts" and the distance the elevator moves outside the door
area "XXX"
Step6: Parameter F3.08 will automatically reset back to “0” once the system has perform the test.
Turn off the UCMP test switch. The elevator will leave the test status, and will return to
normal operation.
System Adjustments
UCMP Test instructions for Limax33 CP
The LIMAX33CP short door locks circuit during re-leveling with the door opened. When the control
system detects the departure from the leveling area; the controller immediately drop the brake and PM1
contactors to stop the elevator operation.
 Test conditions
 Make sure the car is in the middle floor and inside the door zone.（E0.01>2）
 Make sure the car door is closed.
 Test procedure
Step1: Make sure the UCMP test switch (H4.XX = 37)
-175-
System Adjustments
Step2: Turn on the UCMP test switch. The door lock circuit will open. The display should show
“722”. Check below for display for different conditions.
Step3: Go to parameter F3.08. Set this parameter one of the following settings:
• “1”: Moving the car up on level speed.
• “2”: Moving the car down on level speed.
• “3”: Moving the car up on high speed.
• “4”: Moving the car down on high speed.
Step4: When F3.08 is set with one of the setting mentioned above, the control system will activate
LIMAX33CP board to short the door lock circuit and start moving the elevator accordingly.
The LED display will show “Pts”
Step5: As soon as the elevator leaves the door zone, the elevator will stop. The LED display will
alternately display the status "Pts" and the distance the elevator moves outside the door
area "XXX"
Step6: Parameter F3.08 will automatically reset back to “0” once the system has perform the test.
Turn off the UCMP test switch. The elevator will leave the test status, and will return to
normal operation.
 UCMP test Code information
Codes Description
710 Landing door circuit opened when UCMP_TEST on.
711 Car door circuit opened when UCMP_TEST on.
712 No MQ signal input when UCMP_TEST on.(MQ: Middle door zone)
713 No ULM signal input when UCMP_TEST on.(ULM: Up door zone )
714 No DLM signal input when UCMP_TEST on. (DLM: Down door zone )
System Adjustments
715 Down slowdown limit switch activated when UCMP_TEST on.
716 Up slowdown limit switch is activated when UCMP_TEST on.
717 UPS input activated when UCMP_TEST on.
718 Cartop inspection activated when UCMP_TEST on.
719 Machine room inspection activated when UCMP_TEST on.
720 Fault status when UCMP_TEST on.
721 Others elevator operation direct input when UCMP_TEST on.
722 No F3.08 running modes setting when UCMP_TEST on.
724 Pit inspection activated when UCMP_TEST on.
-176-
System Adjustments
Codes Description
730 UCMP test failed when UCMP_TEST on.
Door Contact monitoring test description

Our control system will monitor the status of the door contact every time when the door is fully opened.
If our control system detects a failure of either the car door or the landing door contact, it will trigger a
fault and shutdown the elevator. This fault cannot be reset automatically and will require a manual
reset.
 Test conditions
 Make sure no one is using the elevator.
 Steps
Step1: Make sure no one is inside the elevator and the elevator door is closed.
Step2: Using a piece of wire to jumper terminals A22 and GS on the K-TB1000 board. This will
short the car door contact.
Step3: Put the elevator on inspection and then put it back to normal operation.This will trigger the
control system to open the elevator door.
Step4: When the elevator door is fully open and reached the door open limit, the system will trigger
error 092.This error will latch and require manual reset.
Step5: Remove the jumper and switch the INSP switch to on and off twice to reset the fault.
Step6: Turn the INSP back to NORM position to put the elevator back to normal operation.
Door Lock bypass test description


System Adjustments
Functionalities description
There are two switches inside our control cabinet for the door lock bypass operation. For elevators
with front opening only, the two switches are labeled “BYPASS” and “GATE LK/HALL LK”. The
“BYPASS” switch will put the elevator into door lock bypass mode. The “GATE LK/HAL LK”
switch will allow the user to select which set of lock contact to be bypassed. The lock contact will only
be bypassed when both switches are activated. For elevators with front and rear opening, instead of the
“BYPASS” switch, there will be a switch labeled “FRONT/REAR”. This switch will allow the user to
select either the front or the rear set of door lock to be bypassed. Working in conjunction with the
“GATE LK/HALL LK” switch, the user can determine exactly which set of door contact to be bypassed.
Elevator can only run on inspection operation during the door lock bypass operation.
 Test conditions
 Make sure the elevator is under inspection operation.
 Make sure no one is using the elevator.
-177-
System Adjustments
 Steps
For elevators with front opening only:
Step1: Make sure no one is inside the elevator and the elevator door is closed. Turn on machine
room inspection.
Step2: Turn the “BYPASS” switch to the ON position. This will put the elevator into door lock
bypass mode. If the car is in normal operation at this moment, the system will trigger error
024.
Step3: Turn the “GATE LK/HALL LK” switch to the “GATE LK” position. This will bypass the
car gate lock contact. If the inspection switch is not in the ON position, the safety circuit
will open.
Step4: Remove the wire from terminal GS on C06 plug on K-TB1000 board. The door lock
circuit should remain ON after this wire is removed.
Step5: Run the elevator on machine room inspection (emergency operation) by pressing the RUN
button along with either the UP or DN button. There is an alarm bell on the car that will be
sound while running on inspection with the BYPASS switch activated.
Step6: Stop running the elevator on inspection. Place the wire back to terminal GS on C06 plug
on K-TB1000 board.
Step7: Turn the “BYPASS” switch to the OFF position and turn the “GATE LK/HALL LK” switch
to “NORM” (middle) position. Afterward, turn the machine room inspection to OFF
position. The elevator now should return to normal operation.
Single brake test description

Each of the dual brakes on the gearless machine can be tested separately from the controller. This will
allow verification of brake torque for the corresponding capacity. 3 buttons are included inside the
controller labeled BT1, BT2, and EN. EN is the common button, and BT1 and BT2 are for selecting
which brake to hold pick during the test.
 Test conditions
System Adjustments

 Put full load inside the car.
 Steps
Step1: Run the elevator in down direction at high speed with full load.
Step2: Press and hold BT1 button. The elevator will still be running if only this button is pressed.
Step3: Press and hold EN button. The safety circuit will open once the EN button is pressed.
When the safety circuit is opened, the car will perform an emergency stop. With both TB1
and EN buttons pressed, brake 1 will remain picked.
Step4: Observe the machine sheave or the rope to ensure the elevator is coming to a stop. Once the
car come to a complete stop, this will indicate that the brake 2 is capable of stopping the car
with full load. Release TB1 and EN button if the car is not able to stop. This indicate that
brake 2 is not capable of stopping the car with full load.
-178-
System Adjustments
Step5: Release TB1 and EN buttons to complete the test and put the elevator back to normal
operation.
Step6: Repeat this test and press TB2 button instead of TB1. This will keep brake 2 pick during the
test. This will allow the testing for the brake 1.
Rescue operation description

Manaul rescue operation is available in the controller in case of power failure or controller maufunction.
Brake can be manually picked to allow the elevator to move in the direction of the load to the next door
zone. Once the elevator is inside the door zone, an indicator will be lighted to let the user know to drop
the brake. For the machine room applications, the speed and the direction of the rescue operation can be
viewed via the machine. For machine roomless applications this information can be indicated on the
main board and the K-PI1000 board.
 Test conditions
 The elevator is not in operation.
 Confirm that the backup power is available (ARD or UPS).
 The elevator is not in the door zone.
 Steps
Step1: Put the elevator on emergency operation.
Step2: Press and hold BT1, BT2, and EN buttons. Both sides of the brakes will pick and the
elevator will start to move in the direction of the load.
Step3: For machine room application, monitor the speed and the direction of the elevator by
viewing the movement of the machine. For MRL application, the elevator speed can be
viewed from the LED on the main control board. The direction can be viewed from the
K-PI1000 board in the control cabinet.
Step4: Move the elevator until the door zone light come on. Release BT1, BT2, and EN buttons to
stop the elevator.
System Adjustments
Maintenance protection operation description
To avoid passenger using the elevator while it is in maintenance operation, a special protection function
can be actived to remove the elevator from normal operation and prevent pessengers from using the
elevator. The elevator will not answer hall calls and will not open the door when it is at a landing.
 Test conditions
 Steps
Step1: Elevator is running on normal operation.
Step2: Change parameter F3.12 from “0” to “1”.
-179-
System Adjustments
Step3: All exsiting hall call will be cancel. For group application, the elevator will remove from
the group operation.
Step4: Door open button in the COP will not operate
Step5: Register car calls in the machine room. The elevator will answer the car calls. However,
when the elevator arrives at a landing the door will not open.
Step6: Change F3.12 back to “0” to remove the elevator from the maintenance protection operation.
UCMP for geared traction

When the K-MC1000 is applied in a traction lift with geared drive, a special circuit is required. This
circuit takes care of the correct operation of an Unintended Car Movement Protection (UCMP) by
activating a coil on an overspeed governor. Contacts of relays RD1 and RD2 in series are operating the
UCM coil on the overspeed governor. These contacts of RD1 and RD2 relays are placed in parallel to
a N/O contact of one of the main contactor PM1. The connection through RD1 and RD2 is providing a
dropping delay of 1.0 second. The relay RDX has a time delay (example of time delay contact:
Schneider LAD-T2) open contact that provides the 1.0 second delay. When the safety circuit is
opened, terminal GS (car door contact) during the normal operation, the overspeed governor UCM coil
drops after a delay of 1.0 second. This is being done to prevent accidentally blocking of the overspeed
governor and therefore to prevent entrapment.
During releveling the relays RD1 and RD2 are off. As a result, the delay is no longer present and the
overspeed governor UCM coil will drop immediately dur to opening of the door bridging circuit
(LIMAX33CP) and the N/O contact of the main contactorPM1 when the car leaves the door zone.
Relays RDX, RD1 and RD2 are being monitored for dropping at every start through the board input
PP1 at connector J0 of the K-TB1000 board. Both relays RD1 and RD2 are AC-15 type to meet the
requirements of EN50205. The operation of the overspeed governor UCM coil is also being
monitored by input PP3 at connector J0 of the K-TB1000 board.
 Schematic diagram
System Adjustments
-180-
System Adjustments
 Parameter setting
 Make sure the software on the main processor is A9.0 or above.

 Under MBC Input menu, set PP2= 39
 Under MBC Input menu, set PP3= 38
 Under Custom Function menu, set F1.06 = 1
System Adjustments
-181-
System Adjustments
System Adjustments
-182-
Events/Troubleshooting
6 Events/Troubleshooting
K-MC1000 has fault protection and fault memory functions. It monitors each input signal and running
condition, in addition to external feedback information. If an abnormal situation occurs, the
corresponding protective function is activated and the operator displays the associated error code.
Fault information is divided into five categories. Please see the table below.
Fault list
Fault code Fault name
Fusion low-voltage input terminal function repeatedly defined fault

1
Fusion low voltage input terminal function configuration is not proper
Fusion output terminal function repeatedly defined fault

2
Fusion output terminal function properly configured
3 Drive not ready
4 Drive running fault
No encoder feedback
5
Fusion output operation signal, the "pulse feedback detection delay" after the
time did not receive a pulse signal
6 Pulse counting is reversed
Car or car top controller input terminal function defines fault repeatedly
7
Car or car top controller input terminal function improperly configured
8 Drive running signal stuck failure
9 Motor thermal protection fault Events/Troubleshooting
Brake torque detection overtime fault

10
Brake torque detection time is too long to complete
Car top controller CAN communication fault

11
Fusion controller and car top controller CAN communication poor
12 Fusion board-level communication failure
13 Fusion board-level communication failure
16 Fusion internal communication failure
-183-
Communication between drive controller and elevator controller is abnormal
Car controller CAN communication error

17
Poor CAN communication between car controller and car top controller
In car inspection operation failure

18
During in car inspection operation, K-CC1000 communication failure.
Door lock bypass fault

24
Door lock bypass monitor signal failure
Front door safety board feedback timeout failure
1 In the re-leveling operation state, the front door safety board request signal is
not output.
25
2 In the door lock loop detection state, the front door safety board request
signal is not output.
3 must be manually repaired 2 times to reset the fault, power failure can not be
reset (optional)
Front door security board stuck timeout failure
1 In the re-leveling operation state, the front door security board request signal
is not revoked
26
2 In the door lock loop detection state, the front door security board request
signal is not revoked
reset (optional)
Backdoor safety board feedback timeout failure
1 In the re-leveling operation state, the rear door safety board request signal is
not output.
27
2 In the door lock loop detection state, the rear door safety board request signal
is not output.
reset (optional)
Back door safety board adhesion timeout failure
1 In the re-leveling operation state, the back door security board request signal
28 is not revoked
2 In the door lock loop detection state, the rear door safety board request signal
is not revoked
-184-

reset (optional)
29 UCMP fault
Safety circuit open

30
The system detects that the safety circuit is open or the safety circuit signal is
not monitored.
In operation, the door lock is released

31
Elevator operation system to detect the car door lock circuit or hall lock circuit
disconnected.
Door lock short fault

32
Hall lock or car door lock signal and open the door limit signal at the same time
action
Elevator did not stop in the door zone

33
The system detected that the car does not stop in the door zone under normal
operation.
The high voltage door lock signal and the low voltage door lock monitor signal
are not synchronized
When the safety door lock detection = 0 (both high and low voltage detection),
35
the system detects that there is a change in the high voltage door lock signal
and there is no change in the low voltage door lock signal; or the system detects
no change in the high voltage door lock signal and the low voltage door lock
signal changes.
High-voltage safety signal and low-voltage safety monitoring signal is not

synchronized
36 When the safety door lock detection = 0 (both high and low voltage detection),
the system detects that the high-voltage safety signal has changed and the
low-voltage safety signal has no change; or the system has detected no change
of the high-voltage safety signal and the low-voltage safety signal has changed.
Run time-out fault

37
The elevator high speed running time exceeds the value set in the "Runtime
Protection" menu.
Output contactor monitoring signal without feedback

38
No change in the feedback signal (PX) was detected after the control system
output "Contactor Contactor Output Signal" (TX).
39 Contactor contactor monitoring signal stuck
-185-
The control system detects that the feedback signal (PX) remains in operation
after disconnecting the "heart contactor output signal" (TX).
Door zone signal stuck

40
Door zone signal remain on 5 second after the elevator started to move.
42 Both up and down low speed terminal limits activated at the same time
43 Earthquake fault
44 Light earthquake fault
46 Elevator running speed is greater than 115% of the rated speed
47 Down normal limit switch activated
48 Up normal limit switch activated
Run contactor monitoring signal without feedback

50
No change in the feedback signal (P10) is detected after the control system
outputs "Run contactor output signal" (T1).
Run contactor to monitor signal sticking
51 1 The control system detects that the feedback signal (P10) remains in
operation after disconnecting the "Run contactor output signal" (T1).
2 Switch to inspection 2 times to reset the fault, power can not reset (optional)
Brake contactor monitoring signal without feedback

52
After the control system outputs "Brake output signal" (T2), no change in the
feedback signal (P11) is detected.
Brake contact monitor signal stuck
53 1 The control system detects that the feedback signal (P11) remains in
operation after "Brake output signal" (T2) is turned off.

2 Switch to inspection 2 times to reset the fault, power can not reset (optional)
Brake travel switch monitor signal no feedback

54
After the control system outputs "Brake output signal" (T2), the brake travel
switch signal (P12 and P22) is not detected.
Brake travel switch stuck

55
After the control system disconnects the "brake output signal" (T2), it detects
that the brake travel switch signal (P12 and P22) remains in operation.
-186-
56 Two high voltage door lock input signals are on, low voltage door lock is off
57 High voltage safety input is on and low voltage signal is off
External drive enable signal no feedback

58
After the controller outputs the contactor signal (T1), the input drive external
enable signal (BB) does not operate.
External drive enable signal stuck

59
After the controller turn off the run contactor signal (T1), the input drive
external enable signal (BB) is not off.
Door open fault

60
After the elevator opened the door for 10 seconds, the door opening limit
signal was not detected.
Door close fault

61
After closing the elevator for 10 seconds, the door closing limit signal was not
detected.
62 Open limit and close the door limit signal at the same time
Safety edge / light curtain action timeout fault

64
The system detects the safety edge signal or light curtain signal for more than
180 seconds.
Power supply failure

65
The system is powered by UPS, the controller power failure detection signal
(P20) action.
Door lock contacts failure

66
After the system detects the closing limit signal, no door lock signal is
detected.
70 Up/down terminal limit switches activated at the same time
71 Up and down medium speed terminal limit switch activated at the same time
Low-speed down terminal limit switch signal stuck

72
After the elevator leaves the bottom for 9 seconds, the low speed down
terminal limit switch is not reset.
Low speed up terminal limit switch signal stuck

73
After the elevator has left the top for 9 seconds, the low speed up terminal limit
-187-

switch is not reset.
Medium speed terminal limit switch signal stuck

74
After the elevator left the bottom for 9 seconds, the middle speed down
terminal limit switch is not reset.
Medium speed up terminal limit switch signal stuck

75
After the elevator has left the top for 9 seconds, the medium speed up terminal
limit switch is not reset.
Re-leveling abnormalities
76 1. Re-leveling start, the controller did not receive the safety door open
request signal;
2. Re-leveling start, the controller did not detect the opening relay action.
Terminal landings speed protection

77
Elevator High speed runs to the terminal landing limit switch, the current speed
is greater than the corresponding switch protection speed percentage.
78 High-speed terminal limit switches activated at the same time action
79 Elevator location is abnormal
80 Overload malfunction during re-leveling operation
Contactor abnormal operation

83
The system detected 5 consecutive dirver failures.
Contactor abnormal operation

84
The system detected 10 consecutive failures 50, 52 failures or 54 failures.
85 Re-leveling overtime protection

87 Rope slip detection warning in up direction (optional)
88 Rope slip detection warning in down diection (optional)
Brake torque detection failure
89 1 While performing brake torque detection test, the traction sheave rotation
position exceeds the threshold
2 Switch to inspection 2 times to reset the fault
Door lock circuit detection fault

92
1 While the door is opened, the system detected a short in the door lock circuit.
-188-

2 Switch to inspection 2 times to reset the fault
Onboard battery undervoltage

99
The system detects that the K-MC1000 battery voltage is lower than 2.8V
Over-current during drive speed change (OC1)

100
During acceleration and deceleration, the output current of the driver exceeds
the threshold (about 200% of rated current)
Drive Steady Current Overcurrent (OC2)

101
During steady speed, the driver output current exceeds the threshold (about
200% of rated current)
Deceleration in the main circuit over-voltage (OV1)

102
Main circuit DC voltage exceeds the over-voltage detection threshold (400V
level: about 780V)
Stable main circuit overvoltage (OV2)

103
Main circuit DC voltage exceeds the over-voltage detection threshold (400V
level: about 780V)
Drive module overcurrent or over temperature (OC3)

104
The output current of the drive exceeds the valve S value (about 200% of the
rated current)
106 Module Overcurrent (OC4)
Main circuit voltage abnormality when stopped (OV3)

107
Main circuit DC voltage exceeds the brake threshold (400V level: about 680V)
Earth leakage (GF)

108
Average leakage current> threshold
Drive Overload (OL3)

109
Electronic thermal protection based on drive rated current.
Other overheating (OH2)

110
Drive overheat protection
111 Brake abnormal (BRE)
112 Self test failure 1 (BD)
-189-
113 Self test failure 2 (BER1)
114 Self-test fault 3 (BER2)
116 PG self-test error (PGF)
117 Current transformer self-test failure (CE)
119 Program error (PRE)
Detailed fault detection instructions
121 Instruction Abnormal (EF)
122 Motor self-learning failure (LE)
Stop the main circuit low voltage (UV)

130
Stop the main circuit DC voltage below the detection threshold (400V level:
400V)
131 Parameter setting error (OPE1)
132 Parameter is not reasonable (OPE2)
Heat sink overheating (OH1)
150 Drive heatsink temperature exceeds the set value of the heatsink overheat
protection temperature and maintains the heat sink overheat protection time for
more than the time
151 Input phase loss (PF1)
152 Output phase loss (PF2)
Over speed (OS1)

153
The motor speed exceeds the setting value of "overspeed protection threshold"
and the time beyond "overspeed protection time" is maintained
Excessive speed deviation (OS2)
154 The motor speed deviation exceeds the setting value of "speed deviation
protection threshold" and maintains the time above "speed deviation protection
time"
PG break (PGO)
155
The drive has a frequency output command without receiving a PG pulse
signal
156 PG phase error (PGE)
-190-
The driver receives a positive torque signal but receives a reverse torque (or the
driver receives an inverted torque signal but receives a positive torque)
Over-torque (OL2)
157
The output torque of the drive exceeds the set value of "Over Torque Guard
Threshold" and remains above the "Over Torque Guard Time".
Motor overload (OL1)

159
Electronic thermal protection based on motor rated current
160 External fault (EE)
162 Communication Failure (CCE)
Open Gate Detection Output Phase Loss Protection (PF3)

163
The drive detects a phase loss on the output side before brake pick
164 Current sensors self-test failure
Switch to inspection 2 times to reset the fault, power failure can not reset
(optional)
165
Z phase correction abnormalities (JE)
Shaft height self learning failure 1

211
The total floor setting and self-learned value obtained by the door zone does
not match
Shaft height self learning failure 2

212
Pulse error
Shaft height self-learning failure failure 3

213
Self-learning to the top of the low-speed terminal limit signal does not
activated
Shaft height self-learning failure failure 4

214
Self-learning process slowdown terminal limit switch is not reset
Motor self-learning timeout error

220
Motor self-learning after 1 minute did not receive self-learning success signal
900 Upper terminal limit protection
901 Lower terminal limit protection
-191-
908 Elevator overspeed protection
912 Self-learning speeding
916 Slow down protection
924 UCMP car moves unexpectedly
ELGO System Fault Code
19 No communication in safety box
34 0 Floor comparison error
36 The safety box OC is disconnected in the automatic state
900 Upper terminal limit protection
901 Lower terminal limit protection
908 Elevator overspeed protection
912 Self-learning speeding
916 Slow down protection
924 UCMP car moves unexpectedly
Prompt message code
Prompt code Name

701 Hall door lock did not open
702 Hall door lock did not open
703 Pit reset signal is not active
During inspection or fault condition, the door close limit signal is not received
704
after the door close output
Failure to return leveling 8 times, prompt 706, manual inspection 2 times to

706
reset.
707 UPS failed to return leveling 8 times, prompt 707, manual inspection 2 times to
-192-
reset.
The 40#/79# return station fails 8 times, prompts 708, manual inspection 2
708
times to reset.
750 Reset the fault after the safety circuit is disconnected momentarily
751 Reset the fault after the door lock circuit is disconnected momentarily
-193-
-194-
Maintenance and Repair
7 Maintenance and Repair
In order to ensure that the product can work properly, it must be inspected and maintained regularly in
daily use. If any abnormality occurs during the use of the product, please stop using the search reason
and solve it immediately.
Daily Inspection
 The controller should check the following items during daily use:
 The environment (temperature, humidity, dust, etc.) of the controller meets the standards
required for the normal operation of the controller.
 Controller terminals, on-board jumpers , sensors, etc. are loose or misplaced without
abnormalities.
 The controller printed circuit board has no obvious oxidation and corrosion.
 The input voltage supplied by the controller is within the range required for normal
operation.
 There is no obvious aging phenomenon on the onboard electronic components of the
controller .
Periodic Inspection
The controller should be regularly inspected and maintained by qualified maintenance personnel.
Transterminalation, Storage
Transterminalation considerations
Avoid falling during the handling of the controller to prevent severe vibration or mechanical shock. If
this happens, the controller will be damaged or malfunctioning.
Storage conditions
Avoid using or storing the controller in any of the following environments:
1. Exposure to direct sunlight.
2. Exceeds the temperature and humidity environment defined by the controller
specifications.
3. It is prone to an environment where the temperature changes drastically and condensation
occurs.
4. An environment of corrosive or flammable gases.
5. Dust, salt spray, oil, water vapor or an environment in which chemicals are present.
6. Impact or vibration environment.
In the following environment, adequate protective measures must be taken. If the measures are not in
place, it may be faulty:
1. An environment where static electricity or other forms of noise are present.
2. There is an environment with strong electromagnetic field radiation.
3. An environment in which radioactive rays are present.
4. The environment of power equipment such as high-power power supplies, inverters, etc.
that are too close.
Storage precautions
-195-
It should be placed in a dry and ventilated environment to avoid sun and rain, and the number of
stacked layers should not be too high.
Unpacking and Checking
Check that the accessories are complete, the surface is damaged, whether there is a barcode and
whether there is a test PASS label.
-196-
Application Scheme
8 Application Scheme
8.1 Internal rotor motor troubleshooting instructions

This chapter mainly introduces the troubleshooting instuctions about internal rotor motors
configuration with K-MC1000 system .
Set 1. Wiring control system follow troubleshooting instructions，Motor learn，Run on
inspect，Shaft learn，High speed test run etc.
Set 2. Adjust PI parameters，so that the elevator runs comfortably and resolves any vibration problems.
Adjust all gain parameters，refer to below：
2.1. When the elevator has vibration,try to minimize low-speed proportional gain and high-speed
proportional gain. After vibration problems be solved，try to minimize low-speed integration
time and high-speed integration time.
2.2. Be sure to adjust the proportional gain first,before adjust PI parameters. Adjust 1 unit each
time，untill elevator vibrate.
2.3. The adjustment of integration time is same as proportional gain’s. Adjust 1 unit each time.
Set 3. If the elevator accours current sound in the low-speed running section，it can be improved by
reduce current gain parameters；However, the adjustment range of this parameter can not be too
large，the recommended adjustment threshold is less than 10.
Guidance
Because internal rotor motor has special features，In order to get the right performance, you need to
fine-tune the PI，please adjust patiently.
Reference value：
 Configuration parameters on site：
Elevator speed 1.75m/s Rated load 1000kg
Motor model WR-1000-175-H Traction ratio 2:1
Rated power 11.1kW Rated current 26A
Rated frequency 34.8Hz Rated RPM 209r/min
 Debug experience value：

Application Scheme
NO. Adjustment parameters Setting range Unit Default value Reference value
1. START P GAIN 0～100 - 30 15
2. START I TIME 0～1000 ms 10 2
3. LOW SPEED P GAIN 0～100 - 20 8
-197-
Application Scheme
NO. Adjustment parameters Setting range Unit Default value Reference value
4. LOW SPEED I TIME 0～1000 ms 200 20
5. HIGH SPD P GAIN 0～100 - 20 10
6. HIGH SPD I TIME 0～1000 ms 200 10
7. CURRENT GAIN 20～150 - 50 40
8. TORQUE HOLD TIME 0～2.50 s 0 0.3
Note
With K-MC1000 software version upgrade change，this troubleshooting step may be updated，Separate
notice.
8.2 Introduction to System Built-in Group Control

The elevator integrated controller is embedded with a group control intelligent scheduling algorithm.
When multiple elevator group control occurs, only the K-CB1000 bridge conversion board needs to be
configured to improve the system communication expansion performance, and it supports a maximum
of 8 elevator group control scheduling. At the same time, the dispatching system can dispatch and
assign backdoor outbound calls, as well as backdoor outbound calls.
 System configuration diagram
Block diagram of parallel elevator configuration
K-MC1000 L0.00=1 L0.00=2 K-MC1000
GOH GOH
Terminating resistor ON GOL Terminating resistor ON
GOL
LDH LDH
LDL Terminating resistor ON LDL Terminating resistor ON
Floor n Hall display panel Floor n Hall display panel

K：Set floor address K：Set floor address
B：Installed in the B：Installed in the
back door position back door position
(set back door (set back door
Application Scheme
enable) enable)
Floor 1 Hall display panel Floor 1 Hall display panel

K：Set floor address K：Set floor address
B：Installed in the B：Installed in the
Terminating Terminating
back door position back door position
resistor ON resistor ON
(set back door (set back door
enable) enable)
-198-
Application Scheme
Note: If there is a floor deviation between the two elevators, please set the offset floor under L0.02 on
the main elevator group number L0.00 = 2
Group control elevator configuration block diagram
K-MC1000 L0.00=1 K-MC1000 L0.00=2 K-MC1000 L0.00=8

GOH Terminating GOH Terminating GOH Terminating
GOL resistor OFF GOL resistor OFF GOL resistor OFF
LDH Terminating LDH Terminating LDH Terminating
LDL resistor ON LDL resistor ON LDL resistor ON
S1 S2 S3
Note: S1 / S2 / S3 on all K-CB1000 are set
according to the figure above
CH1 CH1 CH1
CL1 CL1 CL1
K-CB1000 K-CB1000 K-CB1000
CH2 CH2 CH2
CL2 CL2 SW5 SW6 CL2
S1 S2 S3 SW5 SW6 S1 S2 S3 S1 S2 S3 SW5 SW6
Floor n Hall display panel Floor n Hall display panel Floor n Hall display panel
G: Set group number = 1 G: Set group number = 2 G: Set group number = 8
K: Set floor address K: Set floor address K: Set floor address
B: Installed in the back B: Installed in the back B: Installed in the back
door position door position door position
(Set back door enable) (Set back door enable) (Set back door enable)
Floor 1 Hall display panel Floor 1 Hall display panel Floor 1 Hall display panel
G: Set group number = 1 G: Set group number = 2 G: Set group number = 8
K: Set floor address K: Set floor address K: Set floor address
B: Installed in the back B: Installed in the back B: Installed in the back Terminating
Terminating Terminating
door position door position door position resistor ON
(Set back door enable) resistor ON resistor ON (Set back door enable)
(Set back door enable)
 Related settings table for built-in group control system

Default
Menu name Function code Setting range
value
System group number L0.00 0-8 0
Lower offset floor L0.02 0-10 0
Group control base station 1 F2.51 0-65535 1
Application Scheme

Group control back to base station delay F2.59 0-65535 300s
Idle time F2.62 0-65535 60s
Note:
1) When multiple elevators are controlled in groups, the display board outside the normal hall can
be transferred through the K-CB1000 bridge, and the display board outside the disabled hall can
be directly connected to the mainboard's outbound communication interface.
-199-
Application Scheme
2) Please configure the DIP switches on the K-CB1000 bridge board as shown in the figure.
3) The lower offset floor is set in L0.02 of the auxiliary elevator. The parameter of the lower offset
of the main elevator should be set to several.
8.3 ELGO Installation and configuration

 Hoistway installation drawing
Magnetic
stripe
Application Scheme
（Well magnetic strip installation）
-200-
Application Scheme
Accompanying
Magnetic
cable
stripe
Safety
Car top board box
（Car top safety box installation）
Inner Outside
magnetic magnetic
surface surface
Application Scheme
Forbid Better Best

（Magnetic stripe installation requirements）
-201-
Application Scheme
 Car top LIMAX33 CP composition of safety device

It consists of a safety box LIMAX33 CP and a magnetic strip AB20-80-10-1-R-D-15-BK80.
1. Perform overspeed protection

2.Perform UCMP protection
3. Perform reduced stroke protection
4.Perform other safety protection
Magnetic stripe
1.Opening ahead
CAN of schedule
communication OC 2. Perform door
opening and leveling
K-MC1000 LIMAX33 CP
SR1/SR2
Elevator controller Safety box
 Car top LIMAX33 CP port description

Cable line one
No. Color code Code name Meaning
1 Brown 24V+ Working power input (positive)
2 White 24V- Working power input (negative)
3 Yellow CANH CAN communication (positive)
4 Green CANL CAN communication (negative)
5 - SHIELD GROUND
6 Black CAN_G CAN Reference ground
7 Red 12V+ Backup power input (positive)
8 Blue 12V- Backup power input (negative)
9 Pink DZO Leveling signal output
10 White green EN81-21 EN81-21 signal
11 Red blue UP Inspection up
12 Gray pink DOWN Inspection down
13 Yellow brown RESET Reset input signal
14 Brown green WKP Working platform signal
Application Scheme
Cable line two

No. Color code Code name Meaning
1 White OC-IN
Safety circuit switch
2 Brown OC-OUT
3 Blue SR1-IN
Door lock short 1
4 Red SR1-OUT
5 Pink SR2-IN
Door lock short 2
6 Grey SR2-OUT
-202-
Application Scheme
7 Green SGC-IN Automatic feedback detection
 Car top LIMAX33 CP indicator light
Indicator light Meaning Note

Normal mode: 1 blink per second
MODE Mode indicator Pre-debugging mode: 10 flashes per second
Self-learning mode: always on
ERROR Fault indicator Emergency fault blinks, normal fault is always on
TAPE Tape indicator No tape is detected : always on
SGC Status Indicator Output always on
OC Status Indicator Output always on
SR1 Status Indicator Output always on
SR2 Status Indicator Output always on
Lights up slowly without communication, flashes quickly
Communication
CAN_ERR if communication is not good, does not light up when
indicator
communication is normal
CAN_RUN Work indicator CAN open status
 Digital tube ELGO menu

A1 menu ELGO parameter configuration
Function Default
Name Description
code value
ELGO Self-learning startup 6
A1.00 1~200mm/s
speed
A1.01 Upper terminal limit switch 1~1000mm 10
Lower terminal limit 10
A1.02 1~1000mm
Application Scheme
switch
A1.03 Level door area range 20~350mm 200
A1.04 Releveling door area range 20~200mm 140
A2 menu ELGO terminal position self-learning
Function Default
Name Description
code value
A2.00 ELGO shaft self-learning 0：no operation；1：enter；2：exit 0
A2.01 Self-learning on upper 0~65535cm 0
-203-
Application Scheme
Function Default
Name Description
code value
terminal limit switch Learned by shaft self-learning
position
Self-learning on lower
0~65535cm
A2.02 terminal limit switch 0
Learned by shaft self-learning
position
A3 menu ELGO floor self-learing
Function Default
Name Description
code value
Self-study total floor A_XXXXX：Self-study total floor (read-only)
A3.000 0
monitoring B_XXXXX：Set the total floor (read only)
1 floor location 0~65535cm
A3.001 0
self-learning Learned by shaft self-learning
A3.002 0
┋ ┋ ┋ ┋
A3.128 0
UA menu ELGO condition monitoring

Function Default
Name Description
code value
Pre-commissioning： -
Self-learning：
UA.00 ELGO Operating mode
Normal mode：
Application Scheme
 Shaft self-learning
 Shaft self-learning condition

⑴ Must in “inspection”
⑵ Peripheral safety circuit, door lock circuit is on
-204-
Application Scheme
⑶ Inspection up and down can run normally

⑷ Operate follow “Shaft self-learning process”
 Shaft self-learning menu
Shaft self-learning menu
Upper and lower terminal switch position learning Floor location learning
Set the
Number of floors
total
learned
ENT ENT FUN floor
A2.00 0 A3.000 A 000 B 032
ESC ESC FUN
ENT 0:No operate Monitoring

1 1：enter Set default value
2：exit ENT FUN
Monitoring A3.001 00000 00.652
Set default ESC FUN
value
ENT FUN
A2.01 00000 00.357
ESC FUN FUN
126.38 00.385
FUN
FUN
253.68 00.683
FUN
ENT FUN
ENT FUN
A2.02 00000 00.641 A3.128 00000 00.641
ESC FUN ESC FUN
FUN
FUN
125.31 00.316 375.68 00.682
FUN FUN
Application Scheme
-205-
Application Scheme
 Shaft self-learning process

Start Start Start
Peripheral preparation Terminal limit learning Floor learning
◆ Operation makes the elevator in Begin floor self-learning

maintenance state Started learning terminal upper limit
◆ The operator enters the A3.001
◆ Check and set E0.01 = actual floor switch
and press enter to start 1st floor
◆ Make sure the safety input H3 of ◆Operator enters A2.01 press enter
self-learning
the mainboard is on for "upper terminal limit switch"
◆ In inspection, press the up
◆ Ensure that the motherboard door learning
button; make the car run upwards
lock input points H1 & H2 are turned ◆ In inspection, press the up button;
and stop at the leveling position
on make the car run upwards, and stops
on the first floor. The
◆ Ensure that no faults exist in the the car when the car's sill is about
cooperating person in the car
system 15cm higher than the top sill.
must make sure that the car sill is
◆ In A2.01, press “V” to save the
aligned with the Hall sill.
car parking position and complete
◆ In A3.001 press “V” to save
the upper terminal limit switch
the car docking position and
learning.
complete the 1st floor learning
(Note: floors must be studied in
order from bottom to top)
◆ Enter the shaft self-learning menu

A2.00=1 and press Enter
◆ The elevator will automatically
enter the self-learning state of the
shaft Started learning the lower limit Begin floor self-learning
(Hint 1: In the Shaft self-learning , switch of the terminal ◆ The operator enters the A3.001
the peak sounder on the safety box ◆Operator enters A2.02 press enter and press enter to start XXX floor
emits continuous intermittent long for "lower terminal limit switch" self-learning
beeps learning ◆ In inspection, press the up button;
Hint 2: The operator monitoring ◆ In inspection, press the down make the car run upwards and stop
menu / input / output point button; make the car run at the leveling position on the XXX
monitoring / safe box status can be downwards, and stops the car when floor. The cooperating person in
viewed) the car's sill is about 15cm below the the car must make sure that the car
ground sill sill is aligned with the Hall sill.
◆ In A2.02, press “V” to save the ◆ In A3.XXX press “V” to save the
car stop position and complete the car docking position and complete
learning of the lower terminal limit the XXX floor learning
switch.
◆ Open the elevator to the top

leveling position, and press the
up and down buttons to open the ◆ In the A2.00=2 press enter to exit
car door. the Shaft self-learning.
◆ (In order to easily observe the End ◆ Two tips to exit the Shaft self-
leveling accuracy, a cooperating Terminal limit learning learning:
person can be arranged to enter A.UA.00=NOR means exit
the car) successfully. If you do not see the
◆ The operation makes the correct prompt, it means that you
peripheral car door lock short are still in the Shaft self-learning.
B. Intermittent chirping of car top
safety box will stop.
Note: Be sure to remove the door
lock short wiring
End
Peripheral preparation
End
Floor learning
Note
 Self-learning of terminal switch position: the order is not limited, you can learn the terminal
switch position first, or you can learn the terminal switch position first；
 Floor learning: must start from the ground floor in a bottom-up order；
Application Scheme
 Self-learning exit: After the terminal switch position and the floor position have been
learned, the operator enters the menu A2.00, set A2.00 = 2 and press the key ENT to exit the
self-learning mode
 It is recommended that when leveling adjustment, please stop at the same level as possible
when saving in the self-learning mode!
-206-
Application Scheme
8.4 Brake voltage switching application program

1)Application background
In order to enable the motor brake to be opened in an instant, a high current is usually used to open it,
and the pressure is reduced to maintain the brake open operation.
2)Program description
There are currently three options:
Option 1: Use a normally open contactor for delay switching
1) Electrical principle:
K-MC1000
Description:
V-
P11
V-: integrated machine input point common signal;
BRZ1
T2
BRZ1 P11: brake contactor feedback signal;
~ AC 110V
TC2 T2: Brake contactor output point
BRZ2
T7
~ AC 110V
TC2: T2 output point common signal
TC7
BRZ2
T7: Brake start voltage output point
BRZ1
R
PM1
BRZ1 : Brake Contactor
BRZ2 : Brake start voltage contactor
2) Parameter configuration
NO. parameter Set value Description
name
1. Brake 1 Menu path: advanced menu → optional function adjustments
switching → enhanced function configuration → brake switching mode
mode selection
selection Parameters: brake mode switching selection = 1 (the elevator
starts andsimultaneously outputs BRZ1BRZ2 delay [Brake
switching delay] time OFF BRZ2.)
2. K-MC1000 55 Menu path: advanced menu → optional function adjustments
output → K-MC1000 output terminal multi-function configuration
terminal Parameter description: T xx terminal function configuration =
function 55 ( brakestart voltage output point)
configuration
3. Brake 3000ms Menu path: advanced menu → comfort adjustments → running
voltage timing adjustment → brake voltage switching delay
switching Parameter description: default value 1000ms, maximum
delay 5000ms
Application Scheme
Option 2: Use a normally closed contactor for delay switching
1） Electrical principle:
-207-
Application Scheme
K-MC1000
Description:
V-
P11 V-: integrated machine input point common signal;

BRZ1
T2
BRZ1 P11: brake contactor feedback signal;
TC2
~ AC 110V T2: Brake contactor output point
BRZ2 TC2: T2 output point common signal
T7
~ AC 110V T7: Brake start voltage output point
TC7
BRZ2
BRZ1
BRZ1 : Brake Contactor
R
BRZ2 : Brake start voltage contactor
PM1
NO. Parameter Set Description
name value
1. Brake switching 0 Menu path: advanced menu → optional function adjustments
mode selection → enhanced function configuration → brake switching mode
selection
Parameters: brake mode switching selecting = 0 (after starting
the elevator delayed output BRZ1 [brake switch delay] time
outputBRZ2.)
2. K-MC1000 55 Menu path: advanced menu → optional function adjustments
output terminal → K-MC1000 output terminal multi-function configuration
function Parameter description: T xx terminal function configuration =
configuration 55 (brake start voltage output point)
3. Brake voltage 3 000ms Menu path: advanced menu → comfort adjustments → running
switching delay timing adjustment → brake voltage switching delay
Parameter description: default value 1000ms, maximum
5000ms
Option 3: Use a time delay contactor for delay switching

1） Electrical principle:
K-MC1000 Description:
V-
P11 V-: integrated machine input point common

BRZ1
BRZ1 signal;
T2
~ AC 110V
TC2
P11: brake contactor feedback signal;
BRZ1
T2: Brake contactor output point
BRZ1
R TC2: T2 output point common signal
PM1 BRZ1 : Brake Contactor
Application Scheme
NO. Parameter Set value Description
name
1. Brake voltage Adjust the delay For the adjustments method of the time delay relay,
switching contact time please refer to the manual of the corresponding
delay model.
-208-
Appendix
9 Appendix
9.1. K-OP1000 Handheld operator Description

9.1.1. Description of each part
No. Component Name Features
1. Handheld operator Human interface device
Connecting the handheld

Handheld operator
2. operator and control system
Type A USB interface USB (AB) type cable cable
(male)
USB2.0 – MinB1.5m
Type B Mini-USB interface
(male)
Return to the main interface
3. Main menu button
from any interface
Return to the previous
4. Return/exit button interface
Exit when editing mode
5. function button Function configuration button
Controller and operator Control combination buttons to
connection diagram 6. Control button provide more combined
operations
Confirm current operation
7. Confirm button
Go to the next level menu
Move the cursor up
8. Up button
Increase menu setting value
Move the cursor down
9. Down button Decrease the menu setting
value
10. Left button Move the cursor to the left
11. Right button Move the cursor to the right
5V power supply working
5V power
12. indicator, always on under
indicator
normal conditions
13. Reserved NA
Does not light when working
normally, always bright or
14. Reset indicator
shiny when not working
properly
The system is shining when
Door opening the door is opened, and it is
15.
indicator always bright when the door is
opened.
The system lights up when the
16. Closing indicator door is closed, and lights up
when the door is closed.
Shines during normal
Communication
17. operation, flashes or does not
indicator
light when abnormal
Lock car Always lit in the lock car
18.
Appendix
statusindicator operation
Fault status Always lit in the fault
19.
indicator operation
-209-
Appendix
9.1.2. Function Description

Elevator Write the actual configuration parameters of the elevator:
configuration Elevator speed, floor, motor parameters, encoder
parameters parameters, electrical configuration parameters
Motor
Motor parameter self-tuning
self-learning
Inspection run Elevator trial operation, and monitoring of operating status
Debug boot
1. Well
function Well self-learning operation
self-learning
Adjust the elevator running comfort:
Comfort
Adjust parameters according to elevator performance
adjustments
problems
Level deviation
Adjust the flat or lower level deviation on each floor
adjustment
Elevator Write the actual configuration parameters of the elevator:
configuration Elevator speed, floor, motor parameters, encoder
parameters parameters, electrical configuration parameters
Elevator
Motor self-tuning and well self-learning function
self-tuning
Comfort Drive PI adjustment, elevator operation timing adjustment,
adjustments leveling deviation adjustment
Elevator
Advanced protection Drive fault protection, elevator operation protection
2. adjustments parameters
features According to the needs of the configuration: floor display,
Standard function
door layout, lock car, fire, return to base station, idle energy
configuration
saving, parallel and other services
Configure according to requirements: maintenance comfort,
Optional function UPS configuration, door opening and re-leveling, UCMP
configuration function, door control function, input & output signal point
definition, etc.
Control system Password setting, system time setting, default value
parameters configuration, etc.
The monitoring system interrupts the fault and queries the
Fault monitoring
last 40 fault records.
Operational Real-time monitoring of elevator operating parameters:
System status monitoring speed, current, torque and other parameters
3. monitoring System
function Record the installation position and floor height of the
configuration
elevator shaft switch
monitoring
Analog call
Analog CAR OPERATING PANEL/LOP call function
function
Help and System firmware

Appendix
4. Query system controller firmware configuration

supterminal configuration
-210-
Appendix
9.1.3. Instructions
Power-on
LCD
K-MC1000
Enter
Operation prompt000000
[Please enter the system
password]
Enter Esc
UP
MENU
First level menu First level menu
DOWN
Enter Esc
UP
MENU Second level Second level
menu menu
DOWN
Enter Esc
UP Esc/
Third level menu
MENU
Third level menu Enter/
do not save
DOWN Save UP&DOWN/

Enter/ ESC/ changes Modify
Read only return parameter
values
Enter Esc Read-only parameter Modifiable parameter
Left&Right/
左右移位
UP
MENU Fourth level Fourth level Esc/
menu do not save
menu DOWN Enter/
Save UP&DOWN/
Enter/ ESC/ changes Modify
Read only return parameter
values
Read-only parameter Modifiable parameter
Left&Right/
左右移位
Appendix
-211-
Appendix
9.1.4. Handheld operator operating instructions
K-MC1000
Enter button
Ⅰ.INSTALL SET 1.CONFIG PARAM

RATED SPEED Menu
Ⅱ.ADVANCED SET 2.MOTOR LEARN
MAX: 8000mm/s Setting range
Ⅲ.STATE MONITOR Enter 3.RUN ON INSPECT
button 4.SHAFT LEARN MIN: 100mm/s
Ⅳ.HELP SUPPORT
Now setting
5.COMFORT ADJUST NOW: 1750mm/s value
6.LEVEL CORRECT
Cursor
↓button (can move to
left or right)
Ⅰ.INSTALL SET 1.CONFIG PARAM
Ⅱ.ADVANCED SET 2.LIFT SELF TUNE MBC IN LOGIC Menu
Ⅲ.STATE MONITOR Enter 3.COMFORT ADJUST Logical display of

P1 1234567890 input point
button 4.PROTECT PARAM
Ⅳ.HELP SUPPORT P11 1234567890
5.STANDARD FUN P21 1234 Black mark
means “always
6.OPTIONAL FUN closed”
Normal
7.CONTROL PARAM means“always
↓button 8.LANGUAGE SEL open”
Cursor
(can move to left or right):
Change“Closed”：
Ⅰ.INSTALL SET 1.FAULT MONITOR
Key combination CTRL+▲
Change“Opened”：
Ⅱ.ADVANCED SET 2.RUN MONITOR
Key combination CTRL+▼
Ⅲ.STATE MONITOR Enter 3.SYSTEM MONITOR

button 4.CALL MONITOR LEVEL CORRECT Menu
Ⅳ.HELP SUPPORT
FLOOR : 1 Floor
UP LEVEL: 200mm Setting value

↓button
DN LEVEL: 200mm Setting value
Ⅰ.INSTALL SET M_Chip Ver: A02.00

A_Chip Ver: S02.00
Ⅱ.ADVANCED SET Drive Ver: L096.1
Top Car Ver: 2.0 Cursor
Ⅲ.STATE MONITOR Enter F-Car Ver: 2.0 (can move to left or right):
Appendix
R-Car Ver: 2.0 Change“Closed”：

button
OP1000 Ver: 2.0
Ⅳ.HELP SUPPORT RandNum: 136281
Key combination CTRL+▲
Change“Opened”：
Key combination CTRL+▼
-212-
Appendix
9.2. K-OP1000 Parameters List

9.2.1. CONFIG PARAM
No. Menu Description Setting value

BASIC PARAM
According to the elevator nominal speed Default value:1750 mm/s
1. RATED SPEED setting. Min value:100 mm/s
Max value:8000 mm/s
Elevator actual speed setting. Default value:1750 mm/s
2. MAX SPEED Min value:100 mm/s
Max value:[Rated speed]
Set according to the number of partitions Default value:10
3. TOTAL FLOOR installed on the shaft. Min value:2
Max value:64
Set the effective number of floors below Default value:0
4. UNDER FLOOR the ground floor. Min value:0
Max value:10
According to the peripheral electrical, Default value:0x00006E78
5. MBC INPUT LOGIC switch logic configuration settings. Min value:0x00000000
Max value:0xFFFFFFFF
According to the peripheral electrical, Default value:0x00000000
6. CTC INPUT LOGIC switch logic configuration settings. Min value:0x00000000
According to the peripheral electrical, Default value:0x00000000
7. CC INPUT LOGIC switch logic configuration settings. Min value:0x00000000
Set the controller‘s safety circuit signal
input point detection mode.
0: Both detect high and low voltage； Default value:1
8. SAFE CIRCUIT 1:Only detect high voltage； Min value:0
2: Only detect low voltage. Max value:2
Notice：canceled in A1.4 or above
version
MOTOR PARAM
0:V/F Control； Default value:5
9. MOTOR TYPE 2: Asynchronous motor control； Min value:0
5: Synchronous motor control. Max value:5
Set according to the nameplate of the Default value:6.4 kW
10. RATED POWER motor. Min value:0.1 kW
Max value:200.0 kW
Set according to the nameplate of the Default value:20
11. POLE NUMBER motor. Min value:2
Max value:48
Set according to the nameplate of the Default value:15 .0A
12. RATED CURRENT motor. Min value:0.1A
Appendix
Max value:500.0A
RATED Set according to the nameplate of the Default value:300V
13. VOLATAGE motor. Min value:0V
BACK EMF Max value:480V
Set according to the nameplate of the Default value:15.90Hz
14. RATED FREQUEN motor. Min value:0.00 Hz
Max value:600.00 Hz
15. RATED RPM Set according to the nameplate of the Default value:95 rpm
-213-
Appendix

motor. Min value:1 rpm
Max value:36000 rpm
Automatically set after motor
Default value:0.0A
NOLOAD self-learning .
16. This parameter is invalid for synchronous
Min value:0.0A
CURRENT
Max value:500.0A
motor。
Automatically set after motor Default value:1.60Hz
17. RATED SLIP self-learning . Min value:0.10 Hz
Max value:20.00 Hz
Automatically set after motor Default value:1.150Ω
18. LINE RESISTENCE self-learning . Min value:0.010Ω
Max value:30.000Ω
Automatically set after motor Default value:18.0%
19. LEAKAGE REACT. self-learning . Min value:0.0%
Max value:60.0%
0: Clockwise； Default value:0
20. ROTATE DIR. 1: Anti-clockwise. Min value:0
Max value:1
ENCODER PARAM
Set according to the configured encoder
type. Default value:2
21. ENCODER TYPE Min value:0
0：ABZ incremental encoder
Max value:7
2：1387 encoder
Set according to the number of encoder Default value:2048 ppr
22. RESOLUTION nominal pulses. Min value:100 ppr
Max value:20000 ppr
Set the encoder to filter the sampling time Default value:3.0 ms
23. FILTER TIME of the signal. Min value:1.0 ms
Max value:25.0 ms
Set the encoder rotation direction.
0: When the motor is clockwise rotation, Default value:0
24. PHASE SEQUENCE A phase lead; Min value:0
1: When the motor is clockwise rotation, Max value:1
B phase lead.
Set the initial position of the encoder Default value:0.0°
25. POLE ANGLE pole. Min value:0.0°
Max value:359.9°
9.2.2. SELF LEARN
MOTOR LEARN
When "Motor self-learning is ready",

26. STATIC LEARN －
Appendix
start the static self-learning of the motor.
27. DYNAMIC LEARN No such function now. －
DYNAMIC Start motor dynamic correction.

28. －
CORRECT
SHAFT LEARN
-214-
Appendix
In the "hoistway self-learning ready",

29. SHAFT LEARN －
start the static motor learning.
9.2.3. COMFORT ADJUST

DRIVE PI ADJ
Start shock occurs, reduce the set value; Default value:30
30. START P GAIN When starting to roll back, increase the Min value:0
setting value. Max value:100
Start shock occurs, reduce the set value; Default value:10 ms
31. START I TIME When starting to roll back, increase the Min value:0 ms
setting value. Max value:1000 ms
Start shock occurs, increase the set value; Default value:20
LOW SPEED P
32. Start jittering occurs, reduce the set value. Min value:0
GAIN
Max value:100
LOW SPEED I
33. Start jittering occurs, increase the set Min value:0 ms
TIME
value. Max value:1000 ms
Start shock occurs, increase the set value; Default value:20
34. HIGH SPD P GAIN Start jittering occurs, reduce the set value. Min value:0
Max value:100
35. HIGH SPD I TIMEStart jittering occurs, increase the set Min value:0 ms
value. Max value:1000 ms
Set the switching frequency of Default value:50.00 Hz
ASR SWITCH
36. high-speed, low-speed proportional gain Min value:0.00 Hz
FREQ.
and integration time. Max value:300.00 Hz
Set the current loop proportional gain. Default value:50
37. CURRENT GAIN Min value:20
Max value:150
Default value:0
CURRENT COMP 0: No current compensation；
38. 1: Have current compensation。 Min value:0
EN.
Max value:1
To reduce interference and leakage Default value:6.0 kHz
CARRIER FREQU
39. current, the switching frequency of the Min value:2.0 kHz
EN
driver output transistor can be adjusted. Max value:16.0 kHz
0:Disable； Default value:1
40. POSITION LOCK 1:Enable。 Min value:0
Max value:1
RUN SEQU.ADJ
Set curve start acceleration inflection Default value:300 mm/s3
41. START ACC JERK point control parameter. Min value:100 mm/s3
Max value:1000 mm/s3
Appendix
Set the acceleration of the curve during Default value:500 mm/s2

42. ACCELERATE linear acceleration. Min value:100 mm/s2
Set the end of curve acceleration Default value:400 mm/s3
43. END ACC JERK inflection point control parameters. Min value:100 mm/s3
Set curve start deceleration inflection Default value:400 mm/s3
44. START DEC JERK
point control parameter. Min value:100 mm/s3
-215-
Appendix

Set the acceleration of the curve during Default value:500 mm/s2
45. DECELERATE linear acceleration. Min value:100 mm/s2
Set the end of curve acceleration Default value:100 mm/s3
46. END DEC JERK inflection point control parameters. Min value:100 mm/s3
Set the minimum running speed before Default value:6 mm/s
ZERO
47. the elevator stops and closing. Min value:0 mm/s
THRESHOLD
Max value:100 mm/s
Set the system to send the curve to run the
command to the motor response time Default value:10 ms
48. MOTOR LAG TIME difference. Min value:10 ms
Users generally do not need to change this Max value:1000 ms
parameter.
Set the delay before the elevator starts to Default value:50ms
START LOCK
49. run the contactor. Min value:0ms
DELA
Max value:1000ms
Set the time for the given operating Default value:500ms
BRAKE OPEN
50. direction to output the brake contactor. Min value:0ms
DELAY
Max value:1000ms
Set the time from opening the brake to Default value:1000ms
51. VOL.SWITCH DEY switching the brake voltage. Min value:0ms
Max value:5000ms
Set the time at which the brake contactor Default value:500 ms
CURVE GIVE
52. is output and receives the feedback signal Min value:0 ms
DELAY
to a given speed profile. Max value:3000 ms
Set DWELL duration time when start. Default value:0 ms
START DWELL
53. Min value:0 ms
TIME
Max value:65535 ms
Set DWELL duration speed when start. Default value:0 mm/s
START DWELL
54. Min value:0 mm/s
SPD
Max value:65535 mm/s
Set the time from speed retraction to Default value:500 ms
BRAKE OFF
55. brake retraction. Min value:0 ms
DELAY
Max value:1000 ms
Set the time to retract from the brake to Default value:700 ms
56. DIR. OFF DELAY the direction of withdrawal. Min value:0 ms
Max value:1000 ms
Set the time to gradually to cut off the Default value:0.00s
TORQUE HOLD
57. output current until motor power off. Min value:0.00s
TIME
Max value:2.50s
Parking delay release time to run the Default value:0 ms
CONTACTOR
58. contactor to reduce the probability of Min value:0 ms
DELAY
running contactor parking arc. Max value:65535 ms
Appendix
LEVEL OFFSET
Set the level where you need to adjust the Default value:1
59. FLOOR level of the floor. Min value:1
Max value:[total floor]
After the elevator is move up to the level, Default value:200 mm
60. UP LEVEL the height difference between the car and Min value:0 mm
the ridge can be set as follows. Max value:400 mm
-216-
Appendix

After the elevator is move down to the Default value:200 mm
61. DN LEVEL level, the height difference between the Min value:0 mm
car and the ridge can be set as follows. Max value:400 mm
9.2.4. PROTECT PARAM
DRIVE PROTECT
0:No protect；
1: Free-glide stop； Default value:1
OVERLOAD
62. 2: Deceleration stop； Min value:0
PROT.EN
3: Rapid deceleration stop； Max value:4
4:Only warning.
Set the motor 150% overload protection Default value:0.3 min
OVERLOAD
63. detection time. Min value:0.1 min
PROT.TI
Max value:10.0 min
0:No protect；
64. OVER TORQUE EN 2: Deceleration stop； Min value:0
4:Only warning.
Set the maximum torque output drive, Default value:150.0 N•m
OVER
65. more than this value will be reportedMin value:0.0 N•m
TORQ.VALUE
torque fault. Max value:500.0 N•m
Set the torque protection action time.
Default value:5.0 s
66. OVER SPEED TIME Min value:0.1 s
Max value:25.0 s
The maximum torque of the motor in Default value:150.0 N•m
67. DRAG TORQ.MAX dragging mode. Min value:0.0 N•m
Max value:500.0 N•m
The maximum torque of the motor in Default value:150.0 N•m
BRAKE
68. braking mode. Min value:0.0 N•m
TORQ.MAX
Max value:500.0 N•m
The rate at which the torque limit Default value:0.10 s
TORQUE LIM
69. changes is described by the time required Min value:0.01 s
TIME
from 0 to 100%. Max value:2.50 s
ENCODER
70. 1:Enable。 Min value:0
PROT.EN
Max value:1
71. PHASE PROT.EN 1:Enable。 Min value:0
Max value:1
72. Z PHASE PROT.EN 1:Enable。 Min value:0
Appendix
Max value:1
0:No protect；
73. Z PHASE ERROR 2: Deceleration stop； Min value:0
4:Only warning.
Z PHASE ERR Set the threshold of Z-phase pulse error. Default value:0.5
74.
TIMES Min value:0.1
-217-
Appendix

Max value:25.0
Set the number of consecutive errors in Default value:3
Z PHASE ERR
75. the Z-phase pulse. Min value:1
TIMES
Max value:100
0:No protect；
IN.PHASE
76. 2: Deceleration stop； Min value:0
PROT.EN
4:Only warning.
Set the input phase failure protection Default value:20 V
77. IN.PHASE VALUE voltage threshold. Min value:1 V
Max value:100 V
OUTPHASE
PROT.EN
Max value:1
BF OPEN PHASE
EN
Max value:1
LEAK CURRENT
EN
Max value:1
0:No protect；
81. HOT PROT.EN 2: Deceleration stop； Min value:0
4:Only warning.
Set the temperature of the drive heat sink Default value:80℃
82. HOT PROT.TEMP overheat protection. Min value:50℃
Max value:120℃
Set the drive heat sink overheating Default value:3 s
83. HOT PROT.TIME detection time Min value:1 s
Max value:250 s
Set the temperature threshold at when the Default value:45℃
84. FAN STOP TEMP fan shuts off after the drive is stopped Min value:20℃
Max value:100℃
SPEED PROTECT
0:No protect；
85. LOSE SPEED EN 2: Deceleration stop； Min value:0
4:Only warning.
Set the threshold value for which the
Default value:10%
LOSE SPEED feedback speed is less than the
86. Min value:1%
Appendix
VALUE commanded speed percentage using the

Max value:50%
maximum frequency of 100% in%.
Set the time of lose speed condition. Default value:0.50 s
LOSE SPEED
87. Min value:0.01 s
TIMES
Max value:25.0 s
0:No protect； Default value:1
88. OVER SPEED EN 1: Free-glide stop； Min value:0
Max value:4
-218-
Appendix

2: Deceleration stop；
3: Rapid deceleration stop；
4:Only warning.
Set the threshold at which the feedback
Default value:105%
OVER SPEED speed is greater than the commanded
89. Min value:1%
VALUE speed percentage using the maximum
Max value:120%
frequency of 100% in%.
Set the time of over speed condition. Default value:0.10 s
90. OVER SPEED TIME Min value:0.01 s
Max value:25.0 s
The percentage of speed corresponding Default value:135%
TERMIN.SPD
91. to the end station strength. Min value:0%
PROT.
Max value:65535%
RUN PROTECT
The protection time of elevator express, Default value:45 s
92. RUN PROT.TIME back to level or back to the ground floor. Min value:0 s
RUN PROT.TIME =setting value*5。 Max value:500 s
The protection time of elevator back to Default value:100 s
UPS RUN
93. level in UPS condition. Min value:0 s
PROTECT
Max value:500 s
0: Two-door zone range operation Default value:0
RUNTIME OUT timeout;
94. Min value:0
TYPE
1: Full run time-out。 Max value:1
0: Stop immediately Default value:0
95. FAULT STOP TYPE 1: Rapid deceleration stop. Min value:0
Max value:1
Resetting mode of operation timeout
fault Default value:0
96. FAULT37 RESET Min value:0
0: Reset manually；
Max value:1
1: Reset automaticlly.
Door zone signal fault Default value:0
97. FAULT40 RESET 0: Back to the bottom floor to correct; Min value:0
1: Immediately prohibit running。 Max value:1
The time between driver hot switch reset Default value:0 s
98. HOT RESET TIME to elevator restore to normal condtion Min value:0 s
Max value:5000 s
9.2.5. STANDARD FUN
FLOOR DISPLAY
Select the floor which needs to bet setted Default value:1
99. FLOOR display. Min value:1
Set the output character to display. Default value:1617
Appendix
100. DISPLAY Min value:0000

Max value:9999
DOOR POSITION
101. FRONT DOOR Set the front door layout configuration. ——
102. REAR DOOR Set the back door layout configuration. ——
Set the through door layout
103. THROUGH DOOR ——
configuration.
LOCK SERVICE
-219-
Appendix

The destination floor after the elevator Default value:1
104. LK FLOOR been locked. Min value:0
Set lock switch installation floor Default value:1
LK SWITCH
105. Min value:0
FLOOR
Set lock switch logic Default value:0
106. LK SWITCH LOGIC 0:Always open； Min value:0
1:Always closed。 Max value:1
FIRE SERVICE
0: Domestic model； Default value:0
107. FR MODE TYPE 1:HK model； Min value:0
2:English model； Max value:65535
The first destination floor when the Default value:1
108. 1st FR BASE FL. elevator is in fire mode. Min value:0
Set first fire switch installation floor Default value:1
109. 1st FR SW. FL. Min value:0
Set first fire switch logic. Default value:0
110. 1st FR SW.LOGIC 0:Always open； Min value:0
1:Always closed。 Max value:1
The second destination floor when the Default value:0
111. 2nd FR BASE FL. elevator is in fire mode. Min value:0
Delay time for the elevator automatically Default value:5 s
FR MAN
112. enter to the firefighter's status after it has Min value:0 s
SER.DELAY
been forced to fire destination floor. Max value:5000 s
0: Fire output after landing; Default value:1
FR RTN OUTPUT
113. 1: Output only in the fire station fire after Min value:0
EN
landing; Max value:65535
PARK FLOOR
Elevator automatically return to the base Default value:1
114. PARK FLOOR station floor when idle. Min value:0
The time what elevator will Default value:400 s
115. PARK DELAY automatically return to the base station Min value:0 s
after continued idle. Max value:5000 s
0: Open the door automatically；
Default value:0
1: Open the door manually；
116. PARK DOOR OPEN Min value:0
2: Keep to open the door at base Max value:65535
station；
ENERGY SAVING
The time what elevator will Default value:600 s
Appendix
117. ENERGY SAVING automatically go to energy save mode Min value:0 s

after continued idle. Max value:65535 s
OPEN DOOR SET
The time what door will close after door Default value:3 s
118. DOOR OPEN TIME open in place. Min value:0 s
Max value:20 s
DOOR OPEN The delay time of door delay to close Default value:240 s
119.
DELAY after press door delay close button. Min value:0 s
-220-
Appendix

Max value:65535 s
ARRIVAL BELL
After the arrival of the elevator, the Default value:1500 ms
120. RING HOLD TIME station bell output hold time. Min value:0 ms
Max value:5000 ms
Set a certain period of time to open and Default value:
121. RING TIMER SER. stop ringing service. Min value:
Max value:
DUPLEX GROUP
Set the elevator group NO. Default value:0
SYSTEM GROUP
122. Min value:0
NO.
Max value:8
The number of difference floor between Default value:0
123. UP OFFSET FLOOR the highest top and the lowest top. Min value:0
Max value:64
The number of difference floor between Default value:0
DN OFFSET
124. the highest bottom and the lowest Min value:0
FLOOR
bottom. Max value:64
Parallel elevator when at same
floor，door open mode with hall call
registration. Default value:0
DOOR OPEN
125. 0: Main and auxiliary car open door at Min value:0
CONFIG the same ; Max value:65535
1:Main car open door；
2:Auxiliary car open door；
The time when the communication Default value:0 ms
COMM FAULT
126. between the main control board and other Min value:0 ms
TIME
terminals is interrupted. Max value:65535 ms
9.2.6. OPTIONAL FUN
No Menu Description Setting value

INSPECT COMFOR
Elevator inspectiong operation speed. Default value:200 mm/s
127. INSP.RUN 1st SPD Min value:0 mm/s
Max value:630 mm/s
The starting speed of lift inspection Default value:100 mm/s
128. INSP.RUN 2nd SPD operation. Min value:0 mm/s
Max value:200 mm/s
The speed of the elevator machine room Default value:150 mm/s
129. MR INSP SPD maintenance operation. Min value:0 mm/s
Max value:300 mm/s
Inspection overhaul curve starting point Default value:300 mm/s3
130. INSP.ACC.JERK of inflection control parameters. Min value:100 mm/s3
Default value:300 mm/s2
Appendix
Overhaul curve Acceleration during

131. INSP.ACC inspection linear acceleration. Min value:100 mm/s2
Max value:1000mm/s2
Inspection overhaul Curve Acceleration Default value:2000mm/s3
132. INSP.DEC.JERK Point Control Parameters. Min value:1 mm/s3
Max value:10000mm/s3
Overhaul curve Acceleration during Default value:2000mm/s2
133. INSP.DEC
inspection linear deceleration. Min value:1 mm/s2
-221-
Appendix

Max value:10000mm/s2
The time between the speed cancel to the Default value:1000 ms
134. INSP.STOP DELAY brake cancel in inspection running. Min value:0 ms
Max value:5000 ms
TIME SERVICE
135. Timing service En 1:Enable； Min value:0
Max value:65535
Setting some floor timing to open or Default value:NA
136. Timing service CFG close car service. Min value:NA
Max value:NA
DISABLE SET
137. DISABLE EN 1:Enable。 Min value:0
F0.42=2 Max value:1
Set the time to open the door after Default value:15 s
138. HOLD ON TIME pressing the disability button. Min value:0 s
Max value:5000 s
RTN RUN SET
Set the maximum operating speed when Default value:100 mm/s
139. RTN RUN SPD leveling. Min value:0 mm/s
Max value:200 mm/s
UPS FUN SET
140. UPS RUN EN 1:Enable。 Min value:0
Max value:1
Set the operating speed in UPS mode. Default value:100 mm/s
141. UPS RUN SPEED Min value:0 mm/s
Max value:200 mm/s
0: Stop immediately； Default value:0
142. UPS RUN MODE 1: According to set speed emergency Min value:0
stop。 Max value:1
RELEVELING
Set the time to open the door in advance Default value:0 ms
143. PREOPEN DELAY when preopen door condition is Min value:0 ms
available. Max value:10000 ms
Set the speed of re-leveling operation. Default value:15 mm/s
144. RELEVEL SPEED Min value:0 mm/s
Max value: 300mm/s
Set the time to perform the re-leveling Default value:30 s
145. RELEVEL TIME sequence. Min value:0 s
Max value:50 s
The speed value what if elevaltor speed is Default value:500 mm/s
LOW SPEED
146. lower than it ,elevator will output low Min value:0 mm/s
VALUE
Appendix
speed signal . Max value:65535mm/s

UCMP FUN SET
147. UCMP ENABLE 1:Enable。 Min value:0
Max value:1
DOOR CONTROL
0:Two piece of CC-1000； Default value:0
148. COP CONFIG
1: One piece of CC-1000； Min value:0
-222-
Appendix

Max value:65535
0: After holding the door in place without
torque function;
1: After closing the door in place without Default value:0
149. OOR DRIVE TYPE torque output;； Min value:0
2: After opening the door in place Max value:3
without torque output;；
3: After holding the door in place with
0:Disable；
2:Enable；【Elevator operating again
condition: detection lock signal interrupt
Default value:0
once, the elevator can run again】
150. HAND DOOR TYPE Min value:0
6:Enable；【Elevator operating again Max value:65535
condition: Detection of lock signal
interrupt once or delay 5 seconds, the
elevator can run again】
0: When the lock is closed, the two doors
Default value:0
will be closed together.
151. DUALDOOR CTRL Min value:0
1: Close the door in place, terminate the
Max value:65535
corresponding closing instructions;
152. FRDOOR SWITCH 1:Enable； Min value:0
Max value:65535
153. DOOR CLOSE EN 1:Enable。 Min value:0
Max value:1
154. DOOR OPEN EN 1:Enable。 Min value:0
Max value:1
ANTI RIOT FUN
0:Disable；
≠0:Enable，The set value is the valid Default value:0
155. ANTITRICK EN number of car registrations. The Min value:0
command system will not recognize if Max value:65535
regist numbers exceed setting value.
DBLECLICK
156. 1:Enable； Min value:0
CANCEL
Max value:65535
0:Cancel； Default value:0
157. REVERSE CANCEL 1: Keep the registration . Min value:0
Max value:65535
＜10，Forced close door invalid； Default value:0 s
158. FORCE CLOSE EN ≥10，After a set time to force output to Min value:0 s
close door. Max value:65535 s
Appendix
EARTHQUAKE FUN
After the earthquake controller input Default value:0 s
EARTHQUAKE
159. point action, the elevator door holding Min value:0 s
FUN
time. Max value:65535 s
NUDGING FUN
160. NUDGING EN
1:Enable； Min value:0
-223-
Appendix

Max value:65535
Elevator will close the door afer the time Default value:0 s
NUDGING DETEC
161. to detection of light curtain action Min value:0 s
TI
timeout Max value:65535 s
COMMUNICATION
Spare Default value:0
PROTOCOL
162. Min value:0
VERSION
Max value:65535
163. BAUDRATE Min value:0
Max value:65535
164. DUPLEX CONFIG Min value:0
Max value:65535
TEST FUN
165. SYS.LIFT TEST ＞0: Set the system random number of Min value:0
runs. Max value:65535
Test system hallcall CAN
166. HALL CALL TEST NA
communication quality.
ENHANCE FUN
0:Clock-wise; Default value:0
167. ENCODER DIR. 1:Anti-clock-wise. Min value:0
Max value:65535
SLOWDOWN
168. 1:Enable； Min value:0
PROT.
Max value:65535
The time close door output,if the door Default value:0 s
DOORLK ON
169. lock is open when running. Min value:0 s
CLSDEY
Max value:65535 s
0: After the elevator starts to output
BRC1 delay time [brake switch delay]
Default value:0
BRAKE TURN output BRC2;
170. Min value:0
TYPE 1:Elevator starts to output BRC1 and
Max value:1
BRC2 at same time,then cut BRC2
after[brake switch delay].
0: Full correction； Default value:0
171. PG CNT CORRECT 1: Not correct after deceleration； Min value:0
2:Not correct at all； Max value:65535
Set the system to detect encoderless Default value:0 ms
PG FB.DECT
172. pulse feedback signal to determine the Min value:0 ms
DELAY
time. Max value:65535 ms
0: 5 pulse range; Default value:0
173. STOP PLUSE CNT N:N+5 pulse range. Min value:0
Appendix
Max value:65535
0:Back to bottom to correct Default value:0
FL,ERR0R
174. 1:Back to bottom or top nearby to Min value:0
CORRECT
correct. Max value:1
Set the brake travel switch overtime fault Default value:0 ms
FAULT54
175. detection time. Min value:0 ms
DECTTIME
Max value:65535 ms
176. CARCALL 0:Disable； Default value:0
-224-
Appendix

OPENDOOR 1:Enable； Min value:0
Max value:65535
Select the buzzer output or not when
Default value:0
CARCALL BEEP button been pressed.
177. Min value:0
EN 0:Disable；
Max value:65535
1:Enable；
Set the amount of rope slippage
monitoring in operation, beyond the Default value:0 mm
178. ROPE SLIP DETEC value, system report fault Min value:0 mm
0:Disable； Max value:65535 mm
XX：Enable；
Under the machine room inspection
state, press the confirm key to execute
179. BK TORQUE TEST the brake braking force test. NA
The current menu monitors the output
torque.
Under the machine room inspection
state, press Enter key to enter torque
boost mode(No operation 30S
180. SLIP FUN TEST NA
automatically exit).
The current menu monitors the output
current.
MBC INPUT
Select the corresponding input point on Default value:NA
181. PORT the motherboard. Min value:P1
Max value:P24
Set the value of the corresponding input Default value:NA
182. FUN point, different values corresponding to Min value:0
their respective functions. Max value:99
MBC OUTPUT
Select the corresponding output point on Default value:NA
183. PORT the motherboard. Min value:T1
Max value:T7
Set the value of the corresponding output Default value:NA
CTC INPUT
Select the corresponding input point on Default value:NA
185. PORT the CT-board. Min value:P1
Max value:P16
CTC OUTPUT
Select the corresponding output point on Default value:NA
Appendix
187. PORT the CT-board. Min value:T3

Max value:T7
Set the value of the corresponding output Default value:NA
CC INPUT
189. PORT Select the corresponding input point on Default value:NA
-225-
Appendix

the CC-board. Min value:P17
Max value:P32
OTHER I/O
Spare. Default value:NA
191. PORT Min value:P49
Max value:P64
Spare. Default value:NA
192. FUN Min value:0
Max value:99
CUSTOMIZE
FUN Some of the above parameters can be set. Default value:NA
193. Min value:F0.00
Max value:F3.99
The set value depends on the content of Default value:NA
194. NOW the customized function parameter. Min value:0
Max value:65535
MAX RUN CNT
195. RandNumA Random number.
196. InputPW Password.
Set the number of elevator operation
197. MAX RUN CNT NA
limit.
9.2.7. CONTROL PARAM

Set the control system troubleshooting Default value:012345
198. PASSWORD SET authority password Min value:0
Max value:99999
Set the control system internal clock yyyy-MM-dd
199. SYS TIME SET
HH-mm-ss
DEFAULT SET
Restore elevator control part of the
MBC PARAM
200. parameters of the factory configuration NA
RESET
values
Restore drive parameters of the factory
INV PARAM
201. settings. (Motor, Encoder, Elevator NA
RESET
comfort parameters.)
ALL PARAM Restore all machine parameters for the
202. NA
RESET factory configuration values.
BACKUP SET&LOAD
UPLOAD PARAM Upload the backed up controller
Appendix
203. NA
parameters.
DNLOAD PARAM Download the backed up controller
204. NA
parameters.
205. BACKUP SET Back up the controller parameters.
LANGUAGE SEL
LANGUAGE SEL Select the man-machine interface
206. NA
operating language.
-226-
Appendix

Chinese,English.
9.2.8. STATE MONITOR
No. Menu Description Value range Unit

FAULT MONITOR
Record the most recent cause of elevator
INTERRUPT
207. stop fault code, fault time, fault floor and NA NA
FAULT
other information.
Record the last 40 system fault codes,
208. FAULT RECORD and the time of failure, floor and other NA NA
information.
209. RESET DRIVE Reset the manually reset fault of driver. NA NA
DRIVE FAULT
210. FAULT (Fault) Record the lastest drive failure. 100～199
Command frequency Record the command frequency of driver
211. -99.99～99.99 Hz
(Cmd.F.) when lastest drive failure accour.
Actual frequency Record the actual frequency of driver
212. -99.99～99.99 Hz
(Out.F.) when lastest drive failure accour.
Record the encoder feedback frequency
Encoder feedback
213. of driver when lastest drive failure -99.99～99.99 Hz
frequency (FB.F.)
accour.
Output Ampere Record the output ampere of driver when
214. 0.0～999.0 A
(Out.A) lastest drive failure accour.
Command Torque Record the command torque of driver
215. -999.0～999.0 %
(CmdTRQ) when lastest drive failure accour.
Output voltage Record the output voltage of driver when
216. 0.0～999.0 V
(Out.V.) lastest drive failure accour.
DC Bus voltage Record the DC bus voltage of driver
217. 0.0～999.0 V
(DC.V.) when lastest drive failure accour.
Heat sink Record the heat sink temperature of
218. 0～65535 ℃
temperature (HS.T.) driver when lastest drive failure accour.
Auxiliary Record the auxiliary information of
219. 0～99
information (AuxInf) driver when lastest drive failure accour.
RUN MONITOR
Feedback speed Monitor the current actual speed of the
220. 0～65535 mm/s
(FB.SPD) elevator.
Command speed Monitor the current system speed value.
221. 0～65535 mm/s
(CmdSPD)
Current height Monitor elevator car current height.
222. 0～65535 cm
(CUR.H.)
Target frequency Monitor drive target frequency.
223. -99.99～99.99 Hz
(TGT.F.)
Actual frequency Monitor drive output frequency.
224. -99.99～99.99 Hz
(Out.F.)
Appendix
Encoder feedback Monitor drive feedback frequency.

225. frequency -99.99～99.99 Hz
(FB.F.)
226. Motor RPM (PRM) Monitor motor rotation speed. 0～65535 r/m
Output Ampere Monitor drive output current.
227. 0.0～999.0 A
(Out.A.)
228. Output torque Monitor drive output torque. -999.0～999.0 %
-227-
Appendix

(OutTRQ)
Output voltage Monitor drive output voltage.
229. 0.0～999.0 V
(Out.V.)
Output power Monitor drive output power.
230. 0.0～999.0 kW
(Out.P.)
DC Bus voltage Monitor driver bus voltage.
231. 0.0～999.0 V
(DC.V.)
Heat sink Monitor drive heatsink temperature.
232. temperature 0～65535 ℃
(HS.T.)
Encoder pulse Monitor encoder pulse count.
counting or motor
233. 0～65535 NA
actual position
(EN.Cnt)
Used to assess the extent to which the PG
234. Encoder PPR (PPR) 0～65535 Pls
signal is disturbed.
Encoder UVW Monitor encoder UVW phase sequence.
235. sequence 0～65535 NA
(EN.SEQ)
Encoder current Monitor motor pole position.
236. angle 0.0～999.9 °
(EN.ANG)
Run Counting Monitor the number of elevator
237. 0～999999 -
(RunCnt) operations.
Automatically hold Monitor the number of times the elevator
brake force operation performs a brake braking force process.
238. 0～999999 -
count
(BrCnt1)
Automatically hold Monitor the waiting time of holding
brake force waiting brake force test to start.
239. 0～999999 s
time
(BrWait)
Automatic brake Monitor the times of holding brake force
240. force setting count test setted. 0～999999 -
(BrCnt2)
I/O STATUS
Monitoring machine control board input
241. MBC STATUS — —
point real-time status.
Monitor the car roof controller input
242. CTC STATUS — —
point real-time status.
Monitor car controller input point
243. CC STATUS — —
real-time status.
9.2.9. SYSTEM MONITOR

Appendix
SW.POSITION
The relative position.from the switch
244. S1W — mm
S1W to the bottom floor door area.
245. S2W — mm
S2W to the top floor door area.
246. S3W — mm
-228-
Appendix

247. S4W — mm
248. S9W — mm
249. S10W — mm
FL,POSITION
The pulse value when Car in the xx
250. Lower leveling (Dxx) — —
Lower leveling.
The pulse value when Car in the xx
251. High(Fxx) — —
leveling.
The pulse value when Car in the xx up
252. Up leveling (Uxx) — —
leveling.
DRIVE INFO
253. Class Drive rated voltage level. — V
254. Power Drive rated power. — kW
CALL MONITOR
255. MANUAL CALL Used to manual call. — —
256. RANDOM CALL Used to random call. — —
HELP SUPPOR
Fusion firmware View the current Fusion main chip
257. version 1 firmware version. — —
(M_ChipVer)
Fusion firmware View the current Fusion AUX chip
258. version 1 firmware version. — —
(A_ChipVer)
Fusion firmware View the current drive firmware version.
259. version 1 — —
(DriveVer)
CTC-board View the current CTC-board firmware
260. firmware version version. — —
(TopCarVer)
Main CC-board View the current main CC-board
261. firmware version firmware version. — —
(F-CarVer)
AUX CC-board View the current AUX CC-board
262. firmware version firmware version. — —
(R-CarVer)
Handheld firmware View the handheld firmware version.
263. version (OP1000 — —
Ver)
Appendix
9.3. K-OP1002 Parameters list

9.2.1. Motor self-learning menu
Function Default
Name Setting instructions
code value
-229-
Appendix
Function Default
code value
0-V/F control；
B0.00 Motor type 2- Asynchronous motor control； 5
5- Synchronous motor control；
Range：0.1-200.0kW 6.4
B0.01 Motor rated power
Set according to the motor nameplate value
Range：2-120 20
B0.02 Number of motor poles
Range：0.1-500.0A 15.0
B0.03 Motor rated current
Motor rated voltage / Range：1-480V 300
B0.04
induced potential Set according to the motor nameplate value
Range：0.00-600.00Hz 15.90
B0.05 Motor rated frequency
Range：1-36000r/m 95
B0.06 Motor rated speed
Range：0.0-500.0A 0
B0.07 No-load current of motor
Range：0.10-20.00Hz 1.50
B0.08 Motor rated slip
0- ABZ incremental； 2
1-ABZUVW incremental；
B0.09 Encoder type
2-1387 encoder；
7-1313 encoder；
Range：4~65535 ppr 2048
B0.10 Encoder pulse
Set according to the encoder nameplate
0- Phase A ahead； 0
B0.11 Encoder phase sequence
1- Phase B ahead；
Encoder magnetic pole Range：0.0~359.9° 0.0
B0.12
angle Obtained through host self-learning
0-no operation； 0
B0.13 Motor self-learning
1- Host static self-learning；
9.2.2. Basic menu
Function Default
Appendix
code value
0-360V； 1
1-380V；
B1.00 Power supply voltage level 2-400V；
3-420V；
4-480V；
-230-
Appendix
B1.01 Carrier frequency 0.0-16.0Hz 8.0

0- No operation； 1- Dynamic correction 0
B1.04 Motor dynamic correction
enabled；
B1.05 Motor direction switching 0- Forward； 1- Reverse； 0
B1.06 UPS operation enable 0- Disability； 1- Enable； 0

Maximum drag torque 0-250% 50
B1.07
when UPS starts
B1.08 UPS start delay 0.01-2.50s 0.20
B1.11 Torque filtering time 1.0-25.0ms 1.0
B1.15 Output frequency 1.0-1000.0Hz 15.9
9.2.3. Vector control
Function Default
code value
B2.00 Start position lock enable 0-Disable； 1-Enable； 1
B2.01 Start position servo gain 0.0-10.0 0.0
Excitation / start DC lock
B2.02 0.00-2.50s 0.00
time
B2.03 Proportional gain 0-100 30
B2.04 Start integration time 0-1000ms 10
Low speed proportional
B2.05 0-100 20
gain
B2.06 Low speed integration time 0-1000ms 50
High-speed proportional
B2.07 0-100 20
gain
High-speed integration
B2.08 0.01-2.50ms 50
time
B2.09 ASR switching frequency 0.00-300.00Hz 50.00
B2.11 Current gain 0-150 50
B2.12 DWELL proportional gain 0-100 5
B2.13 DWELL points Time 1-250ms 5
B2.14 Encoder filter time 1.0-25.0ms 3.0
B2.15 Stop current release delay 0.00-2.50s 0.00
9.2.4. Protection parameter
Function Default
code value
B3.00 Maximum drag torque 0.0-500.0% 180.0
B3.01 Maximum braking torque 0.0-500.0% 180.0
Over-torque protection
B3.02 0.0-500.0% 150.0
threshold
B3.04 Over-torque detection time 0.1-25.0s 5.0
Motor overload protection
Appendix
B3.06 0.1-10.0min 0.3

time
Stall protection threshold
B3.08 1-50% 10
frequency
B3.09 Stall protection time 0.01-2.50s 0.50
Overspeed protection
B3.11 1-120% 105
threshold frequency
B3.12 Overspeed protection time 0.01-2.50s 0.10
-231-
Appendix
Input phase loss protection

B3.21 1-100V 20
voltage threshold
9.2.5. Elevator parameter setting
Function Default
code value
A0.00 Elevator rated speed 100-10000mm/s 1750
A0.01 Elevator maximum speed 100-A0.00mm/s 1750
A0.02 Emergency electric speed 1-300mm/s 150
A0.03 Overhaul running speed 1-630mm/s 200
A0.04 Overhaul start speed 1-200mm/s 100
A0.05 Speed of leveling 1-1000mm/s 200
A0.06 Releveling speed 1-300mm/s 15
A0.07 UPS operating speed 1-200mm/s 100
A0.08 Start sharp acceleration 100-2000mm/s3 300
A0.09 Acceleration 100-2000mm/s2 500
A0.10 End sharp acceleration 100-2000mm/s3 400
A0.11 Start deceleration 100-2000mm/s3 400
A0.12 Deceleration 100-2000mm/s2 500
A0.13 Ending rapid deceleration 100-2000mm/s3 100
A0.14 Zero speed threshold 0-100mm/s 6
A0.15 Host lag time 0-1000ms 10
9.2.6. Front door door layout setting
Function Default
code value
F1 Front door door layout 1
C0.001 0：Not open the door； 1：Do open the door
setting
F2 Front door door layout 1
setting
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
F128 Front door door 1
layout setting
9.2.7. Back door door layout setting
Function Default
code value
F1 Back door door layout 0
setting
F2 Back door door layout 0
setting
. . . .
. . . .
Appendix
. . . .
F128 Back door door 0
layout setting
9.2.8. Through door layout settings
Function Default
code value
-232-
Appendix
0：Non-through door； 0
F1 Through door layout
C2.001
settings 1：Through door
C2.002
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
C2.128
9.2.9. Upper level deviation setting
Function Default
code value
F1 Upper level deviation 200
D0.001 0-400mm
setting
F2 Upper level deviation 200
D0.002 0-400mm
setting
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
F128 Upper level 200
D0.128 0-400mm
deviation setting
9.2.10. Lower leveling deviation setting
Function Default
code value
F1 Lower leveling 200
D1.001 0-400mm
deviation setting
D1.002 0-400mm
deviation setting
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
D1.128 0-400mm
deviation setting
9.2.11. Floor parameter setting
Function Default
code value
E0.01 Total floor settings 2-128 32
E0.02 Underground setting 0-10 0
E0.03 Fire forced landing 1-E0.01 1
Ladder Locking Floor 1
E0.04 1-E0.01
Setting
Appendix
Setting of the parking base 1

E0.05 1-E0.01
station
9.2.12. Floor display setting (two digits)
Function Default
code value
E1.001 F1 Floor display 0000-9999 1617
-233-
Appendix
E1.002 F2 Floor display 0000-9999 1618

. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
E1.128 F128 Floor display 0000-9999 1824
9.2.13. Floor display settings (three highest digits)
Function Default
code value
E2.001 F1 Floor display 0000-9999 16
E2.002 F2 Floor display 0000-9999 16
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
E2.128 F128 Floor display 0000-9999 17
9.2.14. Custom parameters (common functions)
Function Default
code value
0：Automatic door opening；
Back to the base station to 1：Manually open the door；
F0.06 0
open the door 2：Open the door
64：Random operation enabled；
0：China Fire；
F0.11 Fire Mode Selection 1：Australian Fire； 0
2：British Fire；
High-speed counting 0：Count up；
F0.50 0
direction 1：Direction count；
Door closing in place 0：Enable；
F1.02 signal detection before 0
starting 1：Disabled
0：Jinbo IC card enable；
F1.52 IC card function enable 1：K-I / O-EXT transfer IC card enable； 0
2：K-CI1000 transfer IC card enable；
Hall call lock signal logic 0：Normally open；
F2.02 0
setting 1：Normally close；
Hall call lock signal floor Front door：1-128；
F2.03 1
setting Back door：129-256
Appendix
Hall call fire signal logic 0：Normally open；

F2.04 0
setting 1：Normally close；
Hall call fire signal floor Front door：1-128；
F2.05 1
setting Back door：129-256
Built-in group control
F2.51 1
base station layer1
-234-
Appendix
Function Default
code value
F2.52 0
base station layer2
F2.53 0
base station layer3
F2.54 0
base station layer4
F2.55 0
base station layer5
F2.56 0
base station layer6
F2.57 0
base station layer7
F2.58 10
base station layer8
F2.62 Idle time unit：s 60
DBD group control enable
F3.94 3
setting
9.2.15. Mainboard low voltage input point logic setting
Function Default
code value
Low-voltage input signal 0：Normally open；
H0.01 0
P1 logic 1：Normally close；
H0.02 0
H0.03 0
H0.04 1
H0.05 1
H0.06 1
H0.07 1
H0.08 0
Appendix

H0.09 0
H0.10 1
-235-
Appendix
Function Default
code value
H0.11 1
H0.12 1
H0.13 0
H0.14 1
H0.15 1
H0.16 0
H0.17 0
H0.18 0
H0.19 0
H0.20 0
H0.21 0
H0.22 0
H0.23 1
H0.24 1
0：Normally open；
H0.25 Reserve 0
1：Normally close；
Appendix
H0.26 Reserve 0
H0.27 Reserve 0
-236-
Appendix
9.2.16. Logical setting of car top input point

Function Default
code value
0：Normally open； 0
H1.01 Input signal P1 logic
Appendix
9.2.17. Multi-function settings for motherboard input signals
Function Default
code value
Definition of low-voltage 10
H4.01 0：Reserve
input signal P1
-237-
Appendix
Function Default
code value
Definition of low-voltage 1：DNT1 signal 9
H4.02
input signal P2
Definition of low-voltage 2：UNT1 signal 11
H4.03
input signal P3 3：DNT2 signal
H4.04 4：UNT2 signal
input signal P4
Definition of low-voltage 5：DNT3 signal 2
H4.05
input signal P5
Definition of low-voltage 6：UNT3 signal 0
H4.06
input signal P6 7：Lower limit signal
H4.07 8：Upper limit signal
input signal P7
Definition of low-voltage 9：Leveling signal 43
H4.08
input signal P8
10：Upper level signal
H4.09 11：Lower level signal
input signal P9
Definition of low-voltage 14：Motor thermal protection signal 16
H4.10
input signal P10
Definition of low-voltage 15：Brake stroke switch signal 1 17
H4.11
input signal P11 16：Running contactor monitoring signal
H4.12 17：Brake contactor monitoring signal
input signal P12
Definition of low-voltage 18：Emergency electric 14
H4.13
input signal P13
Definition of low-voltage 19：Inspection signal 18
H4.14
input signal P14 20：Inspection up
H4.15 21：Inspection down
input signal P15
Definition of low-voltage 24：Blackout detection signal 20
H4.16
input signal P16
25：Front door safety door panel monitoring
H4.17 signal
input signal P17
Definition of low-voltage 26：Rear door safety door panel monitoring 0
H4.18
input signal P18 signal
Definition of low-voltage 27：Centralized fire signal 25
H4.19
input signal P19
Definition of low-voltage 28：Very light earthquake 24
H4.20
input signal P20 29：Light earthquake
H4.21 32：Second fire input
input signal P21
Definition of low-voltage 33：Ladder lock signal 47
H4.22
input signal P22
Definition of low-voltage 37：External UCMP_Test switch 52
H4.23
input signal P23 42：Pit inspection signal
Appendix
H4.24 43：Pit inspection repair bit signal
input signal P24
H4.25 Reserve 46：Sealed heart feedback signal 0
H4.26 Reserve 0
47：Brake stroke switch signal 2
H4.27 Reserve 0
H4.28 Reserve 51：Manual release detection 0
H4.29 Reserve 0
-238-
Appendix
Function Default
code value
H4.30 Reserve 52：Bypass signal 0
Definition of high voltage 60
H4.31 60：Door lock monitoring signal
input signal H1
Definition of high voltage 61：Front door lock monitoring signal 61
H4.32
input signal H2
Definition of high voltage 62：Safety monitoring signal 62
H4.33
input signal H3 63：Rear door lock monitoring signal
Definition of high voltage 0
H4.34
input signal H4
9.2.18. Multi-function settings for motherboard output signals
Function Default
code value
0：Reserve
Definition of output signal
H5.01 57
T1 1：Sealed Star Contactor Output
2：Open the door and level the output
H5.02 3：Fire return output 54
T2
4：Seismic output
Definition of output signal 5：Energy-saving output
H5.03 55
T3
6：Front door opening output
Definition of output signal 7：Front door closing output
H5.04 3
T4 8：Back door opening output
9：Back door closing output
H5.05 2
T5 10：Uplink signal
11：Downlink signal
H5.06 44：UPS feedback output 52
T6
47：Preventing trolley output
52：Low-speed signal output
54：Brake contactor output
H5.07 55：Strong brake contactor output 44
T7
57：Running contactor output
58：Emergency electric output
9.2.19. Multifunctional setting of car roof input signal
Function Default
code value
Appendix
Definition of input signal 0：Reserve

H6.01 8
P1
Definition of input signal 1：Driver
H6.02 11
P2 2：Go straight
Definition of input signal
H6.03 3：Overload signal 4
P3
H6.04 Definition of input signal 5
-239-
Appendix
Function Default
code value
P4 4：Front door opened in place
H6.05 5：Front door closed in place 24
P5
Definition of input signal 6：Front door open button
H6.06 27
P6
Definition of input signal 7：Front door close button
H6.07 20
P7 8：Front door light curtain
H6.08 9：Light load signal 21
P8
Definition of input signal 10：Full load signal
H6.09 9
P9
11：Front door safety touch panel
H6.10 12：Front and rear door switch 33
P10
Definition of input signal 13：Operate independently
H6.11 10
P11
Definition of input signal 15：Fireman switch
H6.12 3
P12 20：Back door opened in place
H6.13 21：Back door closed in place 0
P13
Definition of input signal 22：Back door open button
H6.14 0
P14
23：Back door close button
24：Back door light curtain
27：Back door safety touch panel
33：Half load signal
Definition of input signal 34：Door open delay button
H6.15 0
P15
35：Inspection up
36：Inspection down
39：Lighting switch
40：Fan switch
9.2.20. Multifunctional setting of car roof output signal
Function Default
code value
Definition of output signal 0：Reserve 51
H7.03
T3
Definition of output signal 8：Back door open door output 8
H7.04
T4 9：Back door closing output
Definition of output signal 9
H7.05 17：Arrival bell output
T5
Definition of output signal 46：Bypass sound and light alarm output 46
Appendix
H7.06
T6
48：Up to station bell output 17
49：Down to station bell output
H7.07
T7 50：Leveling output
51：Strong closing output
-240-
Appendix
9.2.21. Parallel / group control settings

Function Default
code value
0：Single ladder；
L0.00 Elevator group number 0
1-8：Parallel / group control group number
L0.01 Upper offset floor 0-128 0
L0.02 Lower offset floor 0-128 0
9.2.22. Time parameter setting
Function Default
code value
T0.00 Brake opening delay 0-6000ms 500
T0.01 Brake switching delay 0-6000ms 3000
T0.02 Brake closing delay 0-6000ms 500
Direction cancellation
T0.03 0-6000ms 700
delay
T0.04 Speed reference delay 0-6000ms 500
T0.05 Start anti-shake delay 0-6000ms 50
T0.06 Overhaul parking delay 0-6000ms 1000
Express running
T0.07 0-600s 45
protection
T0.08 UPS operation protection 0-600s 200
T0.09 Idle energy saving delay 0-6000s 600
T0.10 Back to base station delay 0-6000s 400
Thermal protection reset
T0.11 0-6000s 0
delay
T0.12 Arrival clock output time 0-6000ms 1500
T0.13 Door open delay 0-60s 3
T0.14 Early door opening delay 0-6000ms 0
T0.15 Firefighter entry delay 0-6000s 0
Re-leveling operation
T0.16 0-60s 20
protection delay
Disabled door opening
T0.17 0-6000s 15
delay
9.2.23. Multi-function menu
Function Default
code value
P0.00 Debug password 00000-99999 12345
0：No operation
P1.00 Shaft self-learning 0
1：Enter shaft self-learning
0：No operation
P1.01 Clear fault records 0
Appendix
1：Clear fault records

000：No operation
227：Restore control parameters
P1.02 Reset 0
336：Restore drive parameters
554：Restore all parameters
-241-
Appendix
P2.00 Year setting 0000-9999 yyyy

P2.01 Month setting 01-12 mm
P2.02 Day setting 01-31 dd
P2.03 Hour setting 00-23 hh
P2.04 Minute setting 00-59 mm
P2.05 Second setting 00-59 ss
9.2.24. Functional operation
Function
code
0：No operation
U0.00 Call signal ≥128：Corresponding number of random runs
= Floor Station: Register the corresponding floor to run
Brake braking force
U0.02 0：No operation 222：Brake braking force check
detection
9.2.25. Monitoring menu
Function Function
Name Name
code code
Front door outbound
U1.00 Elevator times U7.001
communication detection
…
…
U1.01 Elevator feedback speed
Front door outbound
U1.02 Elevator given speed U7.128
Backdoor outbound
U1.03 Elevator current height U8.001
…
U1.04 Elevator current floor

Fault 1 code Backdoor outbound
U2.00 U8.128
(Recent failure) communication detection
…
U9.00 System random number

Fault 50 code
U2.49 U9.01 Main chip version
(Recent failure)
Mainboard input point status
U3.01 U9.02 Main chip information
monitoring
…
U9.03 Vice chip version

Mainboard input point status
U3.35 U9.04 Vice chip information
monitoring
Car top board input point status
U4.01 U9.05 Car top board version
monitoring
…
U9.06 Front door car board version

Car top board input point status
U4.15 U9.07 Back door car board version
monitoring
Front door car board input point
U5.17 U9.08 Drive software version
status monitoring
…
U9.09 Drive power

Appendix
Front door car board input point

U5.32 U9.10 Driver voltage level
status monitoring
Back door car board input point
U6.17 U9.11 Drive failure sub-code
status monitoring
…
Back door car board input point

U6.32
status monitoring
-242-
Appendix
Appendix
-243-
Historic Version
Historic Version
 Revision History：
Released Date Revision Item Content

2015-05 A.0 - First edition
2016-05 B.0 - Added: Parameter Table
2016-11 C.0 - Added: Internal rotor motor troubleshooting instructions
2018-03 D.0 - Added: EN81-20 Function
2019-03 D.1 - Modify the logo in the manual
Delete #25&#26&#27&#28 fault setting menu
2020-03 E.0 - Added: K-OP1002 operating instructions
Added: ELGO debugging instructions
Added: description of integrated group control
2021-08 F.0 -
2022-03 G.0 - Added: Three-phase 200V class 22kW & 30kW specifications
Added: Display accessories description (K-PI1100, K-PI1200,
K-PI1300)
Revision: Instructions for internal transfer group control
Revised: some parameter default values
Historic Version
-244-
Elevator Integrated Controller
K-MC1000
User manual
This product's specifications, ratings and dimensions are

subject to change without prior notice.
For inquiries regarding the contents of this document, please
contact us.

K-MC1000 User Manual-Q00000037 - EN - 00 - G0 - 20220318

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

K-MC1000 User Manual-Q00000037 - EN - 00 - G0 - 20220318

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Elevator integrated controller

Safety Matters and Specifications Ⅲ

Maintenance and Repair 7

Nidec Kinetek Elevator Technology (Wuxi) Co., Ltd.

4.11. K-03T installation, wiring and commissioning................................................ 76

5.9. Door machine adjustments ................................................................................... 135

5.10. High speed test run ........................................................................................ 140

 Note for readers

Ⅱ Safety Matters and Specifications

If used incorrectly, it can be dangerous and can result in death or serious

Dangerous if used improperly, may result in moderate injury or only

Prohibited Indicates general prohibitions.

Guidance Indicate general user behavior.

Safety Matters and Specifications

 Maintenance and inspection precautions

1.1. Product Information

Trademark Integrated Elevator

Input Parameters Output Parameters

Company Product Power Level Voltage Level PG Card Code

1.3. Product Features

software adjustments, handheld operator adjustments.

1.4. Product coverage

1.5. Product Features

Ref. Name Description Remarks

Ref. Name Description Remarks

Ref. Name Description Remarks

Ref. Name Description Remarks

registration, the buzzer in the car prompts and

Ref. Name Description Remarks

Ref. Name Description Remarks

The system can perform leveling fine-tuning by setting

Ref. Name Description Remarks

Ref. Name Description Remarks

and perform the brake torque detection; give the motor

Ref. Name Description Remarks

Ref. Name Description Remarks

10 Remote monitoring K-N100 and

Ref. Name Description Remarks

1.6. Product Specifications

Voltage class 200V (Three phase)

Carrier frequency (kHz) 4-16

Voltage class 400V(Three phase)

Rated output capacity

2.1. Installation conditions

Altitude Below 1000m. Derating required when above 1000m

2.2. Installation space

200V Class 2.2kW～15kW

400V Class 5.5kW～18.5kW

400V Class 22kW～30kW

400V Class 37kW～75kW

In order to prevent electric shock

Safety measures when starting the elevator

follow the command (reverse, immovable, sudden acceleration, etc.).

3.2. Fusion parts descriptions

3.3. Wiring instructions

3.3.3 Brake resistor connection terminal（+）、PB

3.3.4 K-MC1000 output sideU、V、W

3.3.5 Ground terminal （PE）

Cross-sectional area of one phase line（S） Minimum cross-sectional area of

 The protective earthing conductor must be a yellow-green cable.

3.3.6 Control circuit terminal wiring instructions

3.3.7 CAN communication wiring instructions

3) Common problems and handling of CAN communication site